Kentrox AI296 User Manual

TM  
AI296  
16-Port High Speed Multi-Protocol Line Card  
User’s Guide  
Version 9.8x  
Part Number 296UM Rev 5  
© 2008 by Kentrox, Inc. All rights reserved.  
About this Document  
This document explains how to install, configure, and operate the AI296 16-port high speed  
multi-protocol line card.  
You should have a working knowledge of the following:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Your network  
AISwitchTM technology  
X.25 protocol  
Asynchronous protocols  
TCP/IP  
PC or asynchronous terminal configuration  
i
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Document Conventions  
Document Conventions  
Table 1 describes the text conventions used in this document.  
Table 1 Document Conventions  
Convention  
Meaning  
Screen Text, Menu Items,  
System Prompts, Messages  
and Reports  
This style indicates Kentrox configuration screen text,  
menu items, system prompts, messages, and reports.  
Static Command Text  
Variable Command Text  
...  
In a command statement, this style indicates text that  
should be entered exactly as shown at a command line.  
In a command statement, this style indicates  
user-specified text.  
In a command statement, ellipses (...) signify that the  
preceding parameter can be repeated a number of  
times.  
[ ]  
In a command statement, square brackets indicate an  
optional parameter. Two or more parameters in square  
brackets with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a  
choice of optional parameters.  
[ | ]  
{ | }  
In a command statement, two or more parameters in  
braces with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a  
choice of required parameters.  
Variable Field Text  
This style indicates variable information you type in a  
dialog box field.  
KEYS  
Uppercase body text indicates keys on a keyboard,  
such as the TAB or ENTER keys. Keys used in  
combination are connected with a plus symbol (+).  
Labels  
This style designates physical components on Kentrox  
products such as jumpers, switches, and cable  
connectors.  
Note messages emphasize or supplement important  
points of the main text.  
Note:  
Important:  
Important messages provide information that is  
essential to the completion of a task.  
Tip messages provide information that assists users in  
operating equipment more effectively.  
Tip:  
ii  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Document Conventions  
Table 1 Document Conventions (Continued)  
Convention  
CAUTION:  
Meaning  
Caution messages indicate that failure to take a  
specified action could result in loss of data and/or harm  
to the software or hardware.  
Warning messages indicate that failure to take a  
specified action could result in physical harm to the  
user.  
WARNING:  
iii  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings  
Cautions and Warnings  
Electrostatic Discharge Caution  
CAUTION: Kentrox equipment and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive  
components. Proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions must  
be exercised:  
z
You must remove and install cards in a static-free environment. Wear  
an antistatic wrist strap that is plugged into the Kentrox equipment so  
you are grounded at the same point as the equipment.  
z
z
z
z
Do not remove cards from their antistatic plastic bags until you are  
ready to install them into the chassis.  
Immediately after you remove a card from the chassis, you must  
insert it into its antistatic bag.  
When the cards are not in use, keep them in their antistatic plastic  
bags.  
Do not ship or store cards near strong electrostatic, electromagnetic,  
or radioactive fields.  
Ground Caution  
CAUTION: For Kentrox equipment to operate safely and correctly, there must be a  
safety ground strap between the equipment ground bolts and the office  
ground.  
Proper Cooling Caution  
ENSURE PROPER COOLING  
CAUTION: When AI296 is installed into an AI180TM AIswitch series 180 chassis, the  
chassis must be equipped with the AIcoolTM chassis cooling and Baffle-  
HS heat baffle with sensor assemblies.  
The AI180I AIswitch series 180 integrated chassis has a built-in fan and  
baffle assembly and does not require additional assemblies.  
iv  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings  
FCC Warning  
The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio  
interference, and AI296 is constructed with this electromagnetic interference (EMI)  
limitation in mind. AI296 is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device, that  
is, a device for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas. This  
device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule: Part 15  
Subpart J. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to  
radio and TV reception, requiring the user to take whatever steps are necessary to  
correct the interference.  
Information is available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions. To  
maintain low EMI levels, we suggest that you use only metal connectors and shielded  
cable grounded to the frame.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
v
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance  
Kentrox offers technical support 24 hours a day, seven days a week.  
Before you contact Kentrox for assistance, please have the following information  
available:  
z
z
The type of hardware and software you are using  
The error number and exact wording of any messages that appeared on your  
screen  
z
z
What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred  
How you tried to solve the problem  
Web Site Support  
Support is available 24 hours a day using our Web site at:  
http://www.kentrox.com  
Email Support  
Email support is available 24 hours a day. When you use email support, please be  
sure to include the details of your problem within the email.  
To contact Technical Support, send email to:  
Phone Support  
Phone support is available. When you call Kentrox for support, please be sure you  
are at your computer and have the details of your problem available.  
To contact Technical Support, call (866) 480-3571.  
Kentrox Product Documentation  
To order documentation, please contact your sales representative at  
(800) 247-9482 or +1 (614) 798-2000.  
You can also access and view the most current versions of Kentrox product  
documentation on our Web site at:  
http://www.kentrox.com  
vi  
Table of Contents  
TM  
Menu System ........................................2-1  
TOC-1  
Table of Contents  
TOC-2  
Table of Contents  
TOC-3  
Table of Contents  
TOC-4  
Table of Contents  
TOC-5  
Table of Contents  
TOC-6  
Table of Contents  
TOC-7  
Table of Contents  
TOC-8  
1
Product Description  
This chapter provides an overview of the AI296 16-port high speed multi-protocol line card.  
Guide to this Chapter  
1-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Features  
Features  
The AI296 16-port high speed multi-protocol line card provides 16 physical ports for  
asynchronous or X.25 connections between NEs and OSSs in a carrier’s network.  
AI296 includes the following features:  
Break Propagation  
AI296 supports break propagation on X.25, asynchronous, or TCP protocols. Refer to  
Chapter 8: Alias and Call Routing Configuration for details about available types of  
break handling.  
BX.25 Compatibility  
AI296 is BX.25 compatible and supports passive links.  
DCD/DSR/RTS/DTR Signal Lead Control  
AI296 supports user selectable disconnect on DCD low, DCD high-to-low transition,  
DSR low, and DSR high-to-low transition. Additionally, AI296 allows for user  
selectable connection control of DTR/RTS.  
Dynamic Port Configuration  
Any X.25 or asynchronous parameter can be changed and individual links can be  
reconfigured without resetting AI296. X.25 and asynchronous parameters take effect  
after disabling and then re-enabling the affected link.  
EIA Lead Signaling  
AI296 can program the disconnected and connected states of EIA signals and toggle  
the leads. The system can use EIA signaling to simulate modem style access to host  
computers. These signaling options provide a secure and flexible connection to any  
asynchronous host or modem port. Refer to command staeia on page 9-89 for more  
details.  
IRB Connectivity  
AI296 communicates with other cards in the same chassis over an internal repeater  
bus. It cannot communicate over the backplane with line cards that do not use the  
IRB.  
Line Monitoring Diagnostics  
X.25 line monitoring diagnostics are available from the shell connection. Refer to  
command diag-line on page 9-46 for more details.  
1-2  
               
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Features  
Link-to-Link Call Routing  
Link-to-link call routing lets users route all SVC calls coming in on one X.25 link to  
another X.25 link. By using X.25 link-to-link call routing, it is now possible to create a  
default route for all calls from a specified X.25 link. The alias for the default link-to-link  
route can route all calls destined for the same link. On previous versions of AI296,  
users had to create an alias for each unique called address.  
Performance Monitoring, Maintenance, Troubleshooting  
Shell and winslc commands let users handle performance monitoring, maintenance,  
and troubleshooting for AI296.  
Remote and Local Configuration  
AI296 can be configured from AI198TM by accessing the AI198 menu system. AI198 is  
accessible using a Telnet session or by plugging a terminal into the AI198 Craft port.  
Simultaneous Connections  
AI296 supports up to 1024 simultaneous X.25 to IP and/or IP to X.25 virtual  
connections. It supports 512 simultaneous X.25 to X.25 virtual connections or child  
connections. These connections may be distributed in any combination across the 16  
available serial ports on AI296.  
Single Alias Translation  
Single alias translation allows routing a call from an incoming link on one AI296 to an  
outgoing link on a second AI296/AI232TM/AIscoutTM with a single alias. Generally, this  
feature is used to route an X.25 connection across two AI296/AI232/AIscout cards  
using TCP/IP.  
SNMP Manageability  
AI296 supports configuration using SNMP as well as monitoring. SNMP traps are  
generated by AI296 and are sent to all the management stations that exist in the trap  
table.  
Standalone Configuration  
AI296 operates as a standalone card when it is installed in the AIswitch series 110  
chassis. Standalone mode lets AI296 function without dependence on AI198 for  
configuration and management. Refer to Appendix B: Standalone Mode and Switch  
Mode for more details.  
1-3  
             
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Features  
System Diagnostics  
AI296 lets users view diagnostic data on existing connections and internal information  
about serial links. For more information about viewing system diagnostics, refer to  
sections:  
z
z
z
z
z
TID Multiplexing  
TID multiplexing allows a single call from a legacy X.25 OSS to fan out into multiple  
calls to various NEs. The initiating call may be X.25, asynchronous, or TCP. Refer to  
Chapter 7: TID Multiplexing for more details.  
1-4  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: AI296 Hardware Components  
AI296 Hardware Components  
AI296 has four high density connectors that provide 16 asynchronous, HDLC-Bridge,  
PPP, or X.25 ports. Individual ports are derived by using a cable assembly or a  
distribution panel. Protocol changes to a single port can be made without interrupting  
communications on the other ports. Each port operates at speeds up to 115 kilobits  
per second asynchronous or 128 kilobits per second synchronous.  
AI296 supports both X.25 and TCP/IP protocols and provides concurrent X.25,  
TCP/IP, HDLC-Bridging, and asynchronous functionality. An Ethernet port is available  
on the front panel or on the backplane interface (IRB). AI296 uses the IRB to transfer  
data to and from other cards in the system and network.  
AI296 can be used in an AI shelf with other AI network interface cards to provide  
single, multiple, and redundant trunk lines with a variety of physical port and protocol  
types, including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
EIA-232  
EIA-530  
X.25  
V.35  
IP  
Asynchronous  
PPP  
HDLC-Bridge  
When combined with other AI network interface cards, typical applications include  
collection, concentration and trunking of alarm and event messages from many NEs  
to one or more OSSs and operations centers.  
AI296 meets Bellcore Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) to ensure  
reliable operations in Central Offices and other telecommunications facilities.  
CAUTION: AIswitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components.  
Exercise proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions.  
1-5  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: AI296 Hardware Components  
Front Panel Components  
Figure 1-1 displays the AI296 front panel components.  
DC OK LED  
Illuminates green when +5 Volts are  
present.  
FAULT LED  
Illuminates red if the card fails.  
DC OK  
FAULT  
LINKS 5-8 Connector  
Provides four asynchronous, HDLC-  
Bridge, PPP or X.25 ports.  
LINKS 13-16 Connector Provides four asynchronous, HDLC-  
Bridge, PPP or X.25 ports.  
LINKS 1-4 Connector  
LINKS 9-12 Connector  
ACT LED  
Provides four asynchronous, HDLC-  
Bridge, PPP or X.25 ports.  
LINKS  
13-15  
Provides four asynchronous, HDLC-  
Bridge, PPP or X.25 ports.  
LINKS  
5-8  
Illuminates green when the card is  
transmitting or receiving packets.  
LINK LED  
Illuminates green when valid link integrity  
pulses are being received.  
COL LED  
Illuminates red when collisions are  
detected.  
10BASET Connector  
Specifies the external 10BaseT port  
connector.  
LINKS  
9-12  
LINKS  
1-4  
10  
B
A
S
E
T
AI296  
Figure 1-1  
AI296  
1-6  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Technical Specifications  
Technical Specifications  
Table 1-1 lists the AI296 technical specifications.  
Table 1-1 Technical Specifications  
Description  
Component  
I/O Ports  
16 asynchronous, HDLC-Bridge, PPP or X.25 (selectable  
per port during configuration)  
Note: Individual ports are derived by using a CAB257 cable  
assembly for each connector or by using the Model  
DP196 distribution panel.  
Port Speed  
300 bps to 128 Kbps or external clocking (selectable per port  
during configuration)  
Electrical Interfaces RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 (selectable per port during  
configuration)  
Installation  
Requires one slot in an AI chassis (can be hot swapped)  
4.2 A at +5 VDC, maximum  
Current Draw  
Compliance  
For use with AI UL Listed AIswitch Series Chassis.  
1-7  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Individual Port Access  
Individual Port Access  
Individual ports are accessed by using a cable assembly or a distribution panel. AI296  
uses the following components to derive ports:  
z
z
CAB257 Cable  
The CAB257 cable has a multi-connector end that provides four DB-25 connectors.  
Four CAB257 cables are needed to derive all 16 ports.  
DP196 Distribution Panel  
The DP196 distribution panel provides the physical interface for AI296 with sixteen  
DB-25 connectors. The distribution panel is available in two sizes for 19-inch or 23-  
inch rack installations. Figure 1-2 displays the distribution panel and Table 1-2 lists  
the specifications.  
LINK  
LINK  
1
2
LINK  
LINK  
5
6
LINK 1  
LINK 2  
LINK  
LINK  
5
6
LINK  
LINK  
3
4
LINK  
LINK  
7
8
LINK 3  
LINK 4  
LINK  
LINK  
7
8
Figure 1-2 DP196-19/23 Distribution Panel  
Table 1-2 DP196-19/23 Specifications  
Description  
Specification  
Mounting  
DP196-19—Mounts to a 19-inch rack  
DP196-23—Mounts to a 23-inch rack  
I/O Ports  
Sixteen DB-25 connectors  
Weight (approximately) 2.5 lb. (1.12 kg)  
Size  
Height: 4 in. (10.16 cm)  
Width: 19 in.(48.26cm)/23in. (58.42 cm)  
Depth: 1.12 in. (2.84 cm)  
Cable  
CAB162—Connects one connector (4 ports) on AI296 to  
the distribution panel. Each distribution panel requires  
four cables.  
1-8  
         
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Individual Port Access  
DB-25 Connectors  
Table 1-3 displays pin assignments for the DB-25 connectors on the DP196-19/23  
distribution panel.  
Pin 1  
Pin 14  
Pin 25  
Pin 13  
Figure 1-3 DB-25 connector Pin Assignments  
Table 1-3 displays the DP196-19/23 pin assignment specifications.  
Table 1-3 DP196-19/23 Pin Assignment Specifications  
Pin  
Signal  
Direction  
2
TXD-  
Output  
Input  
Output  
Input  
----  
3
RXD-  
4
RTS-  
5
CTS-  
7
Signal GND  
DCD-  
RXC+  
DCD+  
TXC+  
CTS+  
TXD+  
TXC-  
8
Input  
Input  
Input  
Either  
Input  
Output  
Either  
Input  
Input  
9
10  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
RXD+  
RXC-  
1-9  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Individual Port Access  
Table 1-3 DP196-19/23 Pin Assignment Specifications (Continued)  
Pin  
Signal  
Direction  
19  
20  
23  
RTS+  
DTR-  
DTR+  
Output  
Output  
Output  
The following characteristics apply to pin assignments:  
z
z
z
Any pin assignment not referenced on a connector is not connected.  
Signals with a (-) sign after them are used when RS-232 is selected.  
Signals with both (+) and (-) after them are used when RS-530, V.35, or V.11 are  
selected.  
z
When RS-530 is selected, both the (+) and the (-) signals are used. The DSR is  
only supported in RS-232 mode. There is no DSR+ signal.  
Note: The pin assignments also apply to CAB257.  
RJ45 10BaseT Connectors  
Figure 1-4 displays the RJ45 10BaseT connector.  
Pin 1  
Pin 8  
Figure 1-4 RJ45 10BaseT Connector on an AI296 Front Panel  
Figure 1-4 lists the specifications for the RJ45 10BaseT connector.  
Table 1-4 RJ45 10BaseT Connector Specifications  
Pin  
Signal  
Direction  
1
2
3
6
TD+  
TD-  
Output  
Output  
Input  
RD+  
RD-  
Input  
CAB182 cables connect network elements to the individual connectors on the  
distribution panel (straight through applications).  
1-10  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Typical Applications  
AI296 is used primarily for X.25 trunking and connecting different types of network  
elements. The following applications are discussed in this section:  
z
z
z
z
z
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application  
Figure 1-5 illustrates an asynchronous to TCP/IP application.  
Asynchronous NE  
Asynchronous NE  
Asynchronous NE  
IP Network  
Operating Support System  
AI296  
Figure 1-5 Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application  
1-11  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
The following events occur in Figure 1-5:  
z
z
The OSS sends TCP/IP calls to AI296.  
AI296 routes the TCP/IP calls to an asynchronous NE using an asynchronous  
port.  
IP Over X.25 Networks  
Figure 1-6 illustrates a common IP over X.25 application.  
SNMP  
Manager  
SNMP  
Manageable  
Device  
(example  
AI198)  
X.25 Packet  
Network  
IP Network  
IP Network  
AI296  
AI296  
IP Over Ethernet  
IP Over Ethernet  
Figure 1-6 IP Over X.25 Network  
In Figure 1-6, AI296 is used to tunnel IP traffic through an X.25 network. AI296 can be  
configured to encapsulate IP packets, making it possible to achieve IP connectivity  
across a legacy X.25 network. The most common application for this functionality is to  
transport SNMP management information across an X.25 network.  
Important: IP/X.25 transport works only over SVCs.  
1-12  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Figure 1-6 on page 1-12 illustrates the following events:  
z
The SNMP Network Manager (for example, AppliedView) sends TCP/IP calls over  
an IP/Ethernet network to AIswitch (AI296).  
z
AI296 encapsulates the TCP/IP calls within X.25 SVC calls and sends them  
through the X.25 packet network.  
z
z
The X.25 packet network sends the X.25 calls to a remote AIswitch (AI296).  
The remote AI296 returns the X.25 calls to TCP/IP calls based on its static routing  
tables.  
z
AI296 sends the TCP/IP calls over the IP/Ethernet network to the  
SNMP-managed device (for example, AI198).  
1-13  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Mixed Asynchronous and X.25 Networks  
Figure 1-7 illustrates both X.25 network elements and asynchronous network  
elements connected to a remote OSS using a single X.25 trunk.  
DDM 2000  
X.25 Packet  
Network  
FLM 150  
Operating  
Support System  
AI296  
Titan DACS  
IRB  
DDM 2000  
FLM 150  
Titan DACS  
AI296  
Asynchronous NE  
Figure 1-7 Mixed Asynchronous and X.25 Network  
1-14  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Figure 1-7 illustrates the following events:  
z
z
z
z
The OSS sends X.25 calls through an X.25 packet network to AI296.  
AI296 makes call routing decisions based on the AI198 routing alias.  
AI296 sends local X.25 calls directly to the attached NEs.  
The local AI296 converts local X.25 calls to TCP/IP calls and routes them over the  
IRB to a remote AI296. Routing is based on the routing aliases configured in  
AI198.  
z
The remote AI296 sends asynchronous calls to the attached asynchronous NEs.  
1-15  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
X.25 to TCP/IP Application  
Figure 1-8 illustrates a common X.25 to TCP/IP application. X.25 network elements  
are connected to a router network using a TCP/IP LAN.  
AIswitch  
IRB  
Operating  
Support System  
X.25 NE  
X.25  
X.25 NE  
TCP/IP Network  
AIfocus  
AI296  
X.25 NE  
AIswitch  
TCP/IP  
X.25  
Figure 1-8 X.25 to TCP/IP Application  
Figure 1-8 illustrates the following events:  
z
z
The OSS sends X.25 calls to AIswitch.  
AIswitch converts X.25 calls to TCP/IP calls and sends them over the router  
network.  
z
z
z
z
The router network carries the TCP/IP calls to AIfocusTM.  
AIfocus sends the TCP/IP calls over the IRB to AI296.  
Based on the AI198 routing alias, AI296 converts the TCP/IP calls to X.25 calls.  
AI296 sends X.25 calls to the attached X.25 NEs.  
Like other AIswitch line cards, AI296 terminates X.25 connections and extracts the  
data from them. Unlike other line cards, AI296 can convert the X.25 connections to  
TCP/IP connections across the IRB. The ultimate destination for these TCP/IP  
connections may be one of the following:  
z
An IRB-connected line card in the same chassis, such as another AI296 or an  
AI193-TXTM  
z
z
A locally connected TCP/IP host  
A remote TCP/IP host, indirectly connected to AIswitch using a router network.  
When AI296 establishes a TCP/IP connection to an external device, the IP packets  
are exported from AIswitch by AIfocus or by an AI router.  
1-16  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
X.25 Trunking  
Figure 1-9 illustrates a common X.25 trunking application.  
X.25 NE  
X.25 Packet  
Network  
X.25 NE  
X.25 NE  
Operating  
Support System  
AI296  
X.25 NE  
X.25 NE  
X.25 NE  
AI296  
Figure 1-9 X.25 Trunking  
1-17  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Figure 1-9 illustrates the following events:  
z
The OSS sends X.25 calls through an X.25 packet network (over an X.25 trunk) to  
AI296.  
z
z
AI296 makes call routing decisions based on the AI198 routing alias.  
AI296 sends local X.25 calls directly to its attached NEs. X.25 NEs are connected  
to the OSS with a single X.25 trunk.  
z
z
AI296 converts local X.25 calls to TCP/IP calls and sends them over the IRB to a  
remote AI296.  
The remote AI296 sends remote X.25 calls directly to its attached network  
elements.  
1-18  
2
Using the AI198TM Menu System  
This chapter provides information on starting, ending, and navigating through an AI198 menu  
system session.  
Guide to this Chapter  
2-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TM  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Accessing the Menu System  
Accessing the Menu System  
To access the AI198 menu system:  
1. Log into AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menu. The Main Menu appears.  
>menu  
Main Menu  
01+Configure options affecting the system as a whole  
02+Create, delete, or modify a destination name  
03+Display all destination names  
04+Configure cards  
05+Set or remove connection restrictions based on port numbers  
06+Display all connection restrictions  
07+Configure slot density  
08+Configure the alias translation table  
09+Display the list of alias translation entries  
10+Configure the BOOTP table  
21 Exit the configuration menu system  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
2-2  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
TM  
Navigating the Menu System  
Menu Numbering Structure  
All menus accessed from the Main Menu are identified with a numerical reference at  
the top right corner of the menu screen. This numerical reference specifies the  
location within the menu system. Each digit in the menu number represents a menu  
item that was previously selected. For example, Menu 4.2 indicates that menu item 4  
and 2 were selected.  
>2  
Menu 4.2  
01 Configure as Empty Slot  
02+Configure as AI183/AI185 standard 4/16 port card  
03+Configure as AI193/194 Ethernet card with slot expansion of-----  
04+Configure as AI192/196 X.25 network card with slot expansion of--------  
05+Configure as ASP or Advanced Smart Line Card with slot expansion of--------  
06 Configure as AI196-I network card with LocalView  
07 Configure as AI2524 Router card  
08 Configure as AI294 Ethernet Switch card  
09+Configure as AI196-I network interface card with menu support  
10 Configure as Independent Smart Line Card  
11+Configure as AI296 network interface card  
12+Configure as AI192/196 with full menu support and slot expansion of--------  
13+Configure as AI285 network interface card  
14+Configure as AI232 network interface card  
15 Configure as AI Modem  
16 Configure as AIFlex Fiber LAN Extender Card  
17 Configure as AI120 Card  
18 Configure as AIE1 Card  
19 Configure as AITC Card  
20 Next Page  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
Types of Menu Items  
The following four types of menu items are available:  
z
z
z
z
2-3  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TM  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
Submenus  
Submenus go to deeper levels in the menu hierarchy. They provide additional  
configuration menus. Menu items that contain submenus have a plus sign (+) next to  
their menu item number. In this example, menu item 02 will display a submenu.  
02+Configure as AI232 network interface card  
Some submenus require a selection from a list and then re-display the previous menu  
showing the selection. Other submenus have their own submenus that request  
additional information. After saving the entries, the top-level menu re-appears.  
Toggles  
Toggles display two or more values that can be selected for a parameter. Toggles  
have an asterisk (*) next to their menu item number. Entering the menu item number  
toggles to the next selection.  
In this example, menu items 06 and 07 are toggles.  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
For 06*TCP Default Window Size, the user can toggle between values 200, 512, 1024, and  
2048. For 07*TCP Send Ahead, the user can toggle between ON and OFF.  
Data  
Data menu items request text entries (such as destination names and card  
descriptions) or numeric values (such as port numbers and IP addresses). To enter  
information in a data menu item, enter the menu item number followed by a comma  
(or a space) and the configuration information.  
In this example, the menu item requires an IP address entry.  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------000.000.000.000  
To enter an IP address of 172.016.002.043, enter the following:  
1,172.016.002.043  
The menu re-appears with the entered IP address.  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------172.016.002.043  
To change configuration data that has been entered for a menu item, enter the menu  
item number followed by a comma and the new data.  
2-4  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
TM  
Tip: To change a typed entry, use BACKSPACE to back up to the desired position in  
the text and retype the changes. However, once the user presses ENTER,  
changes can be made only by selecting that menu item and re-entering the  
data.  
Functions  
Menu item functions appear at the bottom of each menu. This example displays menu  
items that can appear and Table 2-1 describes them.  
17 Display first page  
18 Next page  
19 Delete entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
Table 2-1 Menu Item Descriptions  
Menu Item Description  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Displays the first page of a menu.  
Displays additional pages of a menu.  
Deletes information for a specified entry.  
Saves the entered information and re-displays the previous related  
menu.  
Important: Configuration entries take effect only after every screen  
has been saved going back to the main menu.  
21  
Exits a menu without saving changes. All items on the menu return to  
the previously configured values.  
2-5  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TM  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Exiting the Menu System  
Exiting the Menu System  
To exit the menu system:  
1. Access the Main Menu.  
2. Enter 21. The command prompt appears.  
2-6  
 
3
AI296 Local Menu System  
This chapter provides information on the configuration and navigation of the AI296 menu system.  
This system offers on-board configuration capabilities similar to those available in the AI198  
menu system. The AI296 menu system is available when the card is operating in both switch  
mode and standalone mode.  
Guide to this Chapter  
3-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Identifying AI296 Menu System Security Options  
Identifying AI296 Menu System Security Options  
AI296 has a variety of security options, including:  
z
z
z
z
Multilevel User Name and Password Security  
Up to 10 configurable user account profiles can be assigned to an AI296 user. Five  
system profiles are available for providing various levels of user access. For more  
information about user profiles, refer to command profile on page 1-103.  
RADIUS Authentication  
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in  
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary  
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI296  
network. AI296 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and  
synchronous ports. For more information on RADIUS authentication, refer to section  
RADIUS Configuration on page 1-19.  
TACACS+ Authentication  
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission  
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide  
secure access for an entire AI296 network. AI296 TACACS+ authentication is  
available for Telnet, asynchronous, and FTP connections. For more information on  
TACACS+ authentication and server configuration, refer to the following commands:  
z
z
z
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP)  
All asynchronous and synchronous PPP links are configurable to use either PAP or  
CHAP PPP authentication protocols. PAP establishes peer identity using a 2-way  
handshake that is done only upon initial link establishment. CHAP performs a 3-way  
handshake upon initial link establishment, then proceeds to verify the link with 3-way  
handshakes at random intervals. CHAP also encrypts the user’s password over the  
PPP link to provide added security.  
3-2  
         
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI296  
Logging Into AI296  
Log into AI296 with a Telnet connection or with any of AI296’s asynchronous ports  
that are configured as Login ports.  
Note: ai is the default user ID and password. AI296 prompts you to create a new  
user ID and password after the fifth login with the default values. Refer to  
command useradd on page 9-118 to create a new user ID and password.  
Using a Telnet Connection for Login  
Logging in using a Telnet connection requires that AI296 has a configured IP address.  
If an IP address has not been configured, refer to Chapter 4: System Configuration to  
assign an IP address.  
To log into AI296 using a Telnet connection:  
1. Power on AI296.  
2. Connect the Ethernet network connection to the 10BaseT port on the front panel  
of AI296.  
3. Telnet to AI296. The login prompt appears.  
Note: ai is the default user ID and password. There are five grace period logins.  
If after the fifth login a new ID and password have not been created, AI296  
prompts you to create a user ID and password. Use the useradd  
command described in Chapter 9: AI296 Commands to create a user ID  
and password.  
4. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.  
5. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into  
AI296.  
The following message appears when AI296 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
3-3  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI296  
The following message appears when AI296 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.  
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log  
message saying that the login failed. Also, an entry appears in the log file with  
text stating Warning: xconsecutive failed login attemptswhere xis the number  
of consecutive failed login attempts.  
Using an Asynchronous Port for Login  
Two tools are required for logging into AI296 using an asynchronous port:  
z
A PC with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal (included with  
Windows 95/98/2000/XP) or ProComm.  
z
Terminal cable with these specifications: null (RS232) cable with DB25 male  
connector for AI296 distribution panel connection and appropriate connector for  
your PC.  
To log into AI296 using an asynchronous port:  
1. Set the terminal emulation software to the following settings:  
z
z
z
z
9600 baud  
No parity  
Eight data bits  
One stop bit  
2. Power on AI296.  
3. Connect a PC to port 1 on the DP232 distribution panel.  
Note: Link 1 on AI296 is enabled and configured for login by default, which  
allows access through the link. AI296 may also be accessed through any  
asynchronous link that is enabled and configured for login.  
4. Press ENTER. The login prompt appears.  
5. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.  
6. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into  
AI296.  
3-4  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI296  
The following message appears when AI296 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
The following message appears when AI296 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.  
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log  
message saying that login failed. Also, a new entry will appear in the log  
file with text stating Warning: x consecutive failed login attemptswhere xis  
the number of consecutive failed login attempts.  
3-5  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Accessing the Local Menu System  
Accessing the Local Menu System  
To access the AI296 menu session:  
1. Log into AI296. Refer to section Logging Into AI296 on page 3-3 for more  
information.  
2. At the destination menu, enter ai. The AI296 shell prompt appears.  
3. Enter menu. The AI296 Main Menu appears.  
AI296 Main Menu  
+ Link Menu  
+ Alias Menu  
+ System Menu  
+ Static Route Menu  
....................................................................  
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :  
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.  
:..................................................................:  
:
<F1> Help  
<F4> Close  
Note: The Alias Menu is only available when you log into AI296 in standalone mode.  
3-6  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System  
Navigating the Local Menu System  
Arrow keys and keyboard short cuts can be used to navigate through the local menu  
system. Refer to Table 3-1 for a list of arrow key movements and keyboard shortcuts.  
Note: To use the arrow keys in the menu system, make sure the VT100 arrow keys  
are enabled in either your Telnet settings or your terminal emulation program.  
Table 3-1 Direction Keys  
Direction Keys  
Up  
Use the up arrow key or Press <Ctrl-p>  
Use the down arrow key or Press <Ctrl-n>  
Use the right arrow key or Press <Ctrl-f>  
Use the left arrow key or Press <Ctrl-b>  
Down  
Right  
Left  
Identifying Types of Menu Items  
The AI296 local menu system contains data items that let you input information or  
toggle between available selections.  
Data Entry Items  
The following screen shot displays an example of a data entry menu item:  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
To enter information for a data entry menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
Note: If the selected menu item has a range of valid values, that range will  
appear in the bottom right of the screen.  
2. Enter your data.  
To erase existing data for a data entry menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
2. Delete the data using BACKSPACE or DELETE and press ENTER.  
OR  
Enter new data.  
3-7  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System  
To save your changes:  
z
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.  
Enter yto save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes  
as necessary.  
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If  
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.  
Toggle Items  
The following screen shot displays an example of a toggle menu item. The selected  
option has brackets around it.  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Up]  
Down  
To select a value for a toggle menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
2. Highlight the option you want to select and press ENTER. The brackets move to  
that option.  
To save your changes:  
z
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.  
Enter yto save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes  
as necessary.  
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If  
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.  
3-8  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Accessing the Help Menu  
Accessing the Help Menu  
The AI296 help menu lists all available keyboard codes and function keys with their  
associated purposes. The help menu can be accessed by doing one of the following  
things:  
z
z
z
Pressing F1 and ENTER  
Selecting Help on the menu and ENTER  
Pressing ESC-1 and ENTER.  
The following example displays the first page of the local menu system help screen:  
Navigation Help  
Page 1 of 4  
This screen displays when you press the <F1> key or if you enter an invalid key-  
stroke from the Main Menu. The following keyboard function keys are programmed  
to allow you to enter or change data in menus:  
<F1>; <F2>; <F4>; UP Arrow; DOWN Arrow; LEFT Arrow; RIGHT Arrow  
If you can not locate these keys on your keyboard, use the following keyboard  
equivalent codes to provide the same functionality:  
Keyboard Code Function Key  
Purpose  
Esc 1  
Esc 2  
<F1>  
<F2>  
HELP - displays this help screen from any menu.  
SEND - transmits the currently displayed data. You  
are given a confirmation prompt before the actual  
transmittal of data occurs. When you press the <F2>  
key, the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys can then be used  
to access the other commands.  
Press SPACE BAR to continue, or 'q' to quit  
3-9  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Local Menu System: Exiting the Local Menu System  
Exiting the Local Menu System  
To exit the local menu system and save all changes:  
1. Select <F2> Send and press ENTER.  
The following prompt appears:  
Save changes? (y/n)  
2. Save the changes:  
y
3. Select <F4> Close and press ENTER until you are out of the menu system.  
To exit the local menu system without saving changes, execute step 3.  
Note: Entering <CTRL> + Rtakes you directly to the main menu.  
3-10  
   
4
System Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring AI296 system settings with the AI198 menu  
system and the AI296 local menu system. To configure AI296 with the AI198 menu system, the  
AI198 software must be at version 1.90 or later. The AI198 menu system settings take effect only  
when AI296 is operating in switch mode (non-standalone mode).  
Guide to this Chapter  
4-1  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
General System Properties Configuration  
General system properties are configurable at the first level of the AI198 and AI296  
System menu. The following menu items can be configured:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Destination Menu Break Sequence  
Description  
This menu item sets the character sequence that lets the user exit a connection from  
the destination menu.  
Format  
Destination menu break sequences take the following format:  
attention_keystroke [ delay_start, delay_end ] next_character  
attention_keystroke  
Defines the keystroke that indicates that a break  
sequence is coming. Valid values are:  
z <x>where xrepresents the decimal ASCII value  
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9>to  
represent the TAB key.  
z <c>xwhere <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the actual key name. For example,  
enter <c>^to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.  
z <c><x>where <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the decimal ASCII value of the actual  
key name. For example, enter <c><9>to represent  
CTRL+TAB.  
delay_start  
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) you must wait  
before entering the next character. Valid values are  
integers from 0 to 8.  
4-2  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
delay_end  
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) before which  
you must enter the next character. Valid values are  
integers from 1 to 9.  
Note: If you do not enter the next character within the  
configured time frame, then both the  
attention_keystrokeand next_character  
values are treated as data and forwarded.  
next_character  
Defines the next character in the sequence. Valid  
values are:  
z <x>where xrepresents the decimal ASCII value  
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9>to  
represent the TAB key.  
z <c>xwhere <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the actual key name. For example,  
enter <c>^to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.  
z <c><x>where <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the decimal ASCII value of the actual  
key name. For example, enter <c><9>to represent  
CTRL+TAB.  
Note: You can include multiple characters with delays between each in the break  
sequence. For example, <c>^[1,5]x[0,9]k is a valid entry.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11 pg 2.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11 pg 2, enter 3,and the desired destination menu break  
sequence. The maximum length is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.  
This example displays item 03 Destination Menu Break Sequence configured as  
<c>^[2,6]x.  
>3,<c>^[2,6]x  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 2  
01*10 Base T Ethernet-------------------------------------------------------OFF  
02+Radius Configuration Menu  
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[2,6]x  
4-3  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. Enter a character sequence for Destination Menu Break Sequence. Maximum length  
is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.  
The following example displays item Destination Menu Break Sequence set to <c><33>.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
Ethernet Port Settings  
Description  
The Ethernet port settings are configured using two menu items:  
z 10BaseT Ethernet—Enables or disables the 10BaseT Ethernet port on the front  
panel of AI296.  
z Dual Ethernet—Enables or disables simultaneous operation of the faceplate  
mounted 10BaseT Ethernet port and the IRB.  
Note: When the dual Ethernet setting is enabled, the 10BaseT Ethernet setting  
has no effect on AI296 operation.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for both menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11 pg 2.  
2. For 01*10 Base T Ethernet, enter 1to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
3. For 07*Dual Ethernet, enter 7to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 01*10 Base T Ethernet set to ON and 07*Dual Ethernet set to OFF.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 2  
01*10 Base T Ethernet------------------------------------------------------- ON  
02+Radius Configuration Menu  
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[1,5]x  
04+TACACS Configuration Menu  
05 TCP Outgoing Connection Timer (2-360s)-----------------------------------075  
07*Dual Ethernet (On, Off)--------------------------------------------------OFF  
4-4  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For 10 Base T Ethernet, select Off or On. The default is off when running in switch  
mode. The default is on when running in standalone mode.  
3. For Dual Ethernet, select Off or On. The default is Off.  
This example displays 10 Base T Ethernet set to ON and Dual Ethernet set to OFF.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[200]  
512  
1024  
On  
2048  
[Off]  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23  
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 21  
10 Base T Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Off  
[Off]  
[On]  
On  
FTP Port  
Description  
This menu item sets the FTP server port number.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 16 FTP port number, enter 16,and the FTP server port number. Valid values are  
1 to 65534. The default is 21.  
4-5  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays 16 FTP port number set to 220.  
>16,220  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.015  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared----------------------OFF  
10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer--------------------------------------000060  
11 Passive link Standby Mode timer---------------------------------------000025  
12+Link Setup  
13+IP Over X.25 Subnets  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023  
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00220  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For FTP Port, enter the desired FTP port value. Valid values are from 0 to 65534.  
This example displays FTP Port set to 1752.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
[200]  
512  
1024  
On  
2048  
[Off]  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23  
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752  
IP Settings  
Description  
The IP settings are configurable using five menu items in the CLC menu or via a shell  
command on AI296. The configurable values are:  
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
IP address range  
IP subnet mask  
Primary IP router address  
Secondary IP router address.  
4-6  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 01 IP Address, enter 1,and the IP address for AI296. The default is  
000.000.000.000.  
3. For 02 IP Address Range, enter 2,and the number of the IP addresses to be  
assigned to AI296. The valid range is 1 to 255.  
4. For 03 IP Subnet Mask, enter 3,and the IP subnet mask for AI296. The default is  
255.255.255.254.  
5. For 04 Primary IP Router Address, enter 4,and the IP address of the primary router  
for AI296. The default is 000.000.000.000.  
6. For 05 Secondary IP Router Address, enter 5,and the IP address of the secondary  
router for AI296. The default is 000.000.000.000.  
This example displays:  
z 01 IP Address set to 10.38.49.12  
z 02 IP Address Range set to 3  
z 03 IP Subnet Mask set to 255.255.000.000  
z 04 Primary IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.001  
z 05 IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.002  
>5,10.38.0.2  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.038.049.012  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------003  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.038.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----010.038.000.002  
Note: For information about configuring IP setting with shell commands, refer to  
4-7  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Passive Link Settings  
Description  
The passive link settings are configured using three menu items. The configurable  
values are:  
z Passive link down state—Configures standby (DMlock) mode for a passive link.  
When this feature is turned on, a passive link will go into DMlock mode after all  
calls have cleared. When turned off, a passive link will stay up when all calls have  
cleared.  
z Passive link stay inactive timer—Sets the number of seconds a passive link waits  
for a connection to come up before failing.  
z Passive link standby mode timer—Configures the amount of time a link remains in  
standby mode before it becomes idle. Immediately after a passive link becomes  
inactive, it goes into the standby (DMlock) mode.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for the passive link down state  
Data for the passive link stay inactive timer and the passive link standby mode timer  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared, enter 9to select ON or  
OFF. The default is OFF.  
3. For 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer, enter 10,and a value in seconds for the  
passive link stay inactive timer. The minimum value is 25 seconds and the default  
is 60 seconds.  
4. For 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer, enter 11,and a value in seconds for the  
passive link standby mode timer. The minimum value is 5seconds and the default  
is 25 seconds.  
4-8  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared set to ON  
z 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer set to 50  
z 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer set to 20  
>11,20  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.015  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared---------------------- ON  
10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer--------------------------------------000050  
11 Passive link Standby Mode timer---------------------------------------000020  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For Bring passive links down when all calls have cleared, select Yes or No. The  
default is No.  
3. For Time to remain inactive after being brought down, enter a value in seconds.  
The minimum value is 25 seconds and the default is 60 seconds.  
4. For Time to stand by before being brought up, enter a value in seconds. The  
minimum value is 5 seconds and the default is 25 seconds.  
This example displays:  
z Bring passive links down when all calls have cleared set to Yes  
z Time to remain inactive after being brought down set to 50  
z Time to stand by before being brought up set to 20.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [296]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
[200]  
512 1024 2048  
Enabled [Disabled]  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 23  
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 21  
10 Base T Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Bring passive links down when all calls have cleared . . . .  
[Off]  
[Off]  
[Yes]  
On  
On  
No  
Time to remain inactive after being brought down (sec) . . . . . . . .... 50  
Time to stand by before being brought up (sec) . . . . . . . . . . . .... 20  
4-9  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
System Prompt  
Description  
This item sets the system prompt value in the CLI.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 17 Prompt String, enter 17,and the desired system prompt value. There is no  
default prompt string. The maximum length is 64 characters.  
This example displays item 17 Prompt String set to NewPrompt.  
>17,NewPrompt  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.015  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared---------------------- ON  
10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer--------------------------------------000050  
11 Passive link Standby Mode timer---------------------------------------000020  
12+Link Setup  
13+IP Over X.25 Subnets  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023  
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00021  
17 Prompt String------------------------------------------------------NewPrompt  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For System Prompt, enter the desired system prompt.  
This example displays System Prompt set to NewPrompt.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
4-10  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
TCP Settings  
Description  
The TCP settings are configured using two menu items. The configurable values are:  
z TCP default window size—Sets the TCP default window size for AI296. The window  
size specifies how many bytes AI296 will send to another device or how many  
bytes another device may send to the AI296 before receiving an  
acknowledgement.  
Note: A small default window size way slow transfers to and from AI296.  
z TCP send ahead—Enables or disables AI296’s ability to send a TCP window without  
requiring an acknowledgment. When enabled, acknowledgment is not required.  
When disabled, acknowledgment is required.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access System Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 06*TCP Default Window Size, enter 6to select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default  
is 200.  
3. For 07*TCP Send Ahead, enter 7to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 06*TCP Default Window Size set to 1024 and 07*TCP Send Ahead set  
to ON.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.015  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024  
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For TCP Default Window Size, select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default is 200.  
3. For TCP Send Ahead, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
4-11  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays TCP Default Window Size set to 1024 and TCP Send Ahead set to  
Enabled.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
200  
512  
[Enabled]  
[1024]  
2048  
Disabled  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port  
Description  
This item sets the Telnet port value for AI296.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.  
2. For 15 Telnet port number, enter 15,and the desired port number value. Valid  
values are 1 to 65534. The default is 23.  
This example displays 15 Telnet port number set to 122.  
>15,122  
Menu 4.2.11 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.015  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024  
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
09*Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared---------------------- ON  
10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer--------------------------------------000050  
11 Passive link Standby Mode timer---------------------------------------000020  
12+Link Setup  
13+IP Over X.25 Subnets  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00122  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For Telnet Port, enter the desired value. The default is 23.  
4-12  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays Telnet Port set to 55.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 55  
200  
512  
[Enabled]  
[1024]  
2048  
Disabled  
4-13  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
RADIUS Configuration  
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in  
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary  
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI296  
network. AI296 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and  
synchronous ports. The following menu items can be configured for RADIUS:  
z
z
Server Settings  
Description  
The RADIUS server settings are configured using four menu items for the primary and  
secondary server. The configurable values are:  
z Primary/secondary server status—Enables or disables the primary or secondary  
server.  
z Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines an IP address for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server port—Defines the port number for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server secret—Defines a password for the primary or secondary  
server.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for primary/secondary server status  
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
To configure the RADIUS server settings:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11-2.2.  
2. For 01*Primary Server Status, enter 1to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is  
DISABLED.  
3. For 02 Primary Server IP Address, enter 2,and the desired IP address. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
4-14  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
4. For 03 Primary Server Port, enter 3,and the desired port number. The default is  
1812.  
5. For 04 Primary Server Secret, enter 4,and the desired password. The default is  
applied.  
6. If desired, repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.  
This example displays:  
z 01*Primary Server Status set to ENABLED  
z 02 Primary Server IP Address set to 050.023.156.012  
z 03 Primary Server Port set to 122  
z 04 Primary Server Secret set to hilltop.  
>4,hilltop  
Menu 4.2.11-2.2  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For RADIUS Primary Server Status, select Enabled or Disabled.  
3. For IP address, enter an IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For Port Number, enter a port number. The default is 1812 for RADIUS servers.  
5. For Secret, enter a password. The default is applied.  
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary RADIUS server.  
This example displays:  
z RADIUS Primary Server Status set to Enabled  
z IP Address set to 12.33.57.2  
z Port Number set to 122  
z Secret set to newone.  
RAS Configuration Menu  
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . . [Enabled] Disabled  
IP Address . . . . .... 12.33.57.2 Port Number . . . . . 122  
Secret . . . .............. newone  
4-15  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
Shell/FTP Options  
Description  
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for RADIUS as one of the following:  
z Enabled—Enables RADIUS login.  
z Disabled—Disables RADIUS login.  
z Local fallback—Enables RADIUS login, but resorts to local login if the RADIUS  
login fails.  
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11-2.2.  
2. For 09*Shell/FTP Radius Option, enter 9to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL  
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.  
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP Radius Option set to LOCAL FALLBACK.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.11-2.2  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED  
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000  
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------01812  
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------- applied  
09*Shell/FTP Radius Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:  
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Shell RAS Option, select Disabled, RADIUS, RADIUS/Fallback. The default is  
Disabled.  
4-16  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
This example displays the shell RAS option set to RADIUS/Fallback.  
RAS Configuration Menu  
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . . [Enabled] Disabled  
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0 Port Number . . . . 1812  
Secret . . . .............. newone  
RADIUS Secondary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . Enabled [Disabled]  
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0 Port Number . . . . 1812  
Secret . . . ............. applied  
Shell RAS Option:  
Disabled  
RADIUS  
[RADIUS/Fallback]  
4-17  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
TACACS+ Configuration  
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission  
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide  
secure access for an entire AI296 network. AI296 TACACS+ authentication is  
available for Telnet, asynchronous, asynchronous PPP, and FTP connections. The  
following menu items can be configured for TACACS+ on the AI198 menu system:  
z
z
Note: TACACS+ is not configurable from the AI296 local menu system. For  
information on configuring TACACS+ when logged into AI296, refer to shell  
9-99.  
Server Settings  
Description  
From the AI198 Menu System, the TACACS+ server settings are configured using  
four menu items for the primary and secondary server. The configurable values are:  
z Primary/secondary server status—Enables or disables the primary or secondary  
server.  
z Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines an IP address for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server port—Defines the port number for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server secret—Defines a password for the primary or secondary  
server.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for primary/secondary server status  
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
To configure the TACACS+ server settings:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11-2.4.  
2. For 01*Primary Server Status, enter 1to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is  
DISABLED.  
4-18  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
3. For 02 Primary Server IP Address, enter 2,and the IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
4. For 03 Primary Server Port, enter 3,and the port number. The default is 49.  
5. For 04 Primary Server Secret, enter 4,and the password. The default is applied.  
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.  
This example displays:  
z 01*Primary Server Status set to ENABLED  
z 02 Primary Server IP Address set to 050.023.156.011  
z 03 Primary Server Port set to 122  
z 04 Primary Server Secret set to hilltop.  
>4,hilltop  
Menu 4.2.11-2.4  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
Shell/FTP Options  
Description  
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for TACACS+ as one of the following:  
z Enabled—Enables TACACS+ login.  
z Disabled—Disables TACACS+ login.  
z Local fallback—Enables TACACS+ login, but resorts to local login if the  
TACACS+ login fails.  
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
Important: Configuration of the shell/FTP TACACS+ option results in privilege level  
authorization and supersedes any TACACS+ configuration on the AI296  
card.  
To configure the shell/FTP TACACS+ option:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11-2.4.  
4-19  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
2. For 09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option, enter 9to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL  
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.  
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option set to LOCAL FALLBACK.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.11-2.4  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)---------------------------DISABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00049  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
applied  
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED  
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000  
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------00049  
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------- applied  
09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK  
4-20  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
SNMP Configuration  
This section discusses SNMP configuration options. The following configuration  
components are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
Authentication Traps  
Description  
This item enables or disables the generation of authentication failure traps by AI296.  
When a user enters faulty login information, authentication traps are sent from an  
SNMP agent to inform the management station about the incorrect login attempt.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.8.  
2. For 04*Send authentication traps, enter 4to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
The following example displays item 04*Send authentication traps set to ON.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.11.8  
01 Contact person for this node------------------------------------------------  
02 Node name-------------------------------------------------------------------  
03 Node location---------------------------------------------------------------  
04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Send authentication traps, select On or Off. The default is ON.  
4-21  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
The following example displays the selection of On for menu item Send authentication  
traps.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
Community Names  
Description  
SNMP community names provide embedded password access to MIB contents.  
There are three menu items available for configuring AI296 SNMP community name  
information:  
z Read Community Name—Sets the name that permits read only access to all objects in  
the MIB.  
z MIB2 Read Community Name—Sets the name that permits read only access to all  
objects in MIB2.  
z Write Community Name—Sets the name that permits read and write access to all  
objects in the MIB.  
Menu Item Types  
Data for all menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.8.  
2. For 05 Read Community Name, enter 5,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.  
3. For 06 MIB2 Read Community Name, enter 6,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.  
4. For 07 Write Community Name, enter 7,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.  
4-22  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
The following example displays:  
z
z
z
Item 05 Read Community Name set to ReadComm.  
Item 06 MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.  
Item 07 Write Community Name set to WriteComm.  
>7,WriteComm  
Menu 4.2.11.8  
01 Contact person for this node------------------------------------------------  
02 Node name-------------------------------------------------------------------  
03 Node location---------------------------------------------------------------  
04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON  
05 Read Community Name-------------------------------------------------ReadComm  
06 MIB2 Read Community Name------------------------------------------------MIB2  
07 Write Community Name-----------------------------------------------WriteComm  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For menu item Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.  
3. For menu item MIB2 Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.  
4. For menu item Write Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.  
The following example displays:  
z
z
z
Item Read Community Name set to ReadComm.  
Item MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.  
Item Write Community Name set to WriteComm.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.30  
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.60  
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.20  
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0  
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0  
Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ReadComm  
MIB2 Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... MIB2  
Write Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... WriteComm  
4-23  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Contact Persons  
Description  
This item defines the name of the person to contact regarding a specific node.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.8.  
2. For 01 Contact person for this node, enter 1,and the desired contact person. The  
maximum length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays John Doe configured for menu item 01 Contact person  
for this node:  
>1,John Doe  
Menu 4.2.11.8  
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Contact person for this managed node, enter the contact person. The maximum  
length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays John Doe configured for menu item Contact person for  
this managed node:  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe  
Node Information  
Description  
There are two menu items available for configuring node information:  
z Node Name—Defines the name of a location on a network.  
z Node Location—Defines a location on a network.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
4-24  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.8.  
2. For 02 Node name, enter 2,and the node name. The maximum length is 40  
characters.  
3. For 03 Node location, enter 3,and a node location description. The maximum  
length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node  
location Office B.  
>3,Office B  
Menu 4.2.11.8  
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe  
02 Node name------------------------------------------------------------newNode  
03 Node location-------------------------------------------------------Office B  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Node name, enter the node name. The maximum length is 40 characters.  
3. For Node location, enter a node location description. The maximum length is 40  
characters.  
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node  
location Office B.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... newNode  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... Office B  
SNMP Manager  
Description  
An SNMP manager is a combination of monitoring software running on a network  
management station (NMS) and the actual device running the software. It collects and  
acts on information from the various devices being monitored and/or controlled. The  
SNMP manager also periodically polls the devices it is managing to get status  
information. AI296 allows for the configuration of up to 5 SNMP managers.  
Note: SNMP managers are only configurable when AI296 is in standalone mode.  
They are not configurable through the AI198 menu system.  
4-25  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For SNMP Manager #1, enter the IP address of the first SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
3. For SNMP Manager #2, enter the IP address of the second SNMP manager. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For SNMP Manager #3, enter the IP address of the third SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For SNMP Manager #4, enter the IP address of the fourth SNMP manager. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
6. For SNMP Manager #5, enter the IP address of the fifth SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
The following example displays:  
z SNMP Manager #1 set to 10.65.32.4  
z SNMP Manager #2 set to 10.65.32.5  
z SNMP Manager #3 set to 10.65.32.6  
z SNMP Manager #4 set to 10.65.32.7  
z SNMP Manager #5 set to 10.65.32.8  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.4  
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.5  
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.6  
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.7  
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.8  
4-26  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Static Route Configuration  
Static Route Configuration  
AI296 allows for the configuration of static routes using both the AI198 and AI296  
menu systems.  
IP Address Settings  
Description  
Static routes are configured with a destination and next hop IP address. The  
destination IP address defines the static IP route you want to configure. The next hop  
IP address defines the IP address of the router you want the system to use when  
trying to reach the destination IP address.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.14.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.14, enter a value from 3to 11. Menu 4.2.11.14.1 appears.  
3. For 01 Destination IP, enter an IP address value.  
4. For 02 Next Hop IP, enter an IP address value.  
The following example displays the configuration of destination address 84.238.45.2  
and next hop address 23.51.93.5.  
>2,023.051.093.005  
Menu 4.2.11.14.1  
01 Destination IP-----------------------------------------------084.238.045.002  
02 Next Hop IP--------------------------------------------------023.051.093.005  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Static Route Menu.  
2. Select [Add]. The IP Static Route Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Destination IP Address, enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.  
4. For Next Hop IP Address, enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.  
The following example displays the configuration of destination IP address 12.240.54.3  
and next hop IP address 12.240.54.4.  
IP Static Route Edit Menu  
Destination IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.3  
Next Hop IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.4  
4-27  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
The following are available:  
z
z
z
z
Inactivity Timeout  
Description  
This menu item defines the amount of time (in seconds) the Modem Mux connection  
must be inactive before it times out.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 06 Inactivity Timeout, enter 6,and a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to  
100000. The default is 300.  
This example displays 06 Inactivity Timeout set to 1500.  
>6,1500  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None  
05 Init String-----------------------------------  
06 Inactivity Timeout (0 - 100000)---------------------------------------001500  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Inactivity Timeout, enter a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to 100000.  
The default is 300.  
4-28  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
This example displays Inactivity Timeout set to 1500.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seven  
[One]  
Even  
[Eight]  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
Init String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............................  
Inactivity Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 1500  
Initialization String  
Description  
This menu item defines the string that is sent upon indication that there is a device  
connected to the port (DSR asserted).  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 05 Init String, enter 5,and an initialization string value. Maximum length is  
30 characters.  
This example displays 05 Init String set to conn23.  
>5,conn23  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None  
05 Init String-----------------------------------  
conn23  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Init String, enter a string value. Maximum length is 30 characters.  
4-29  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
This example displays Init String set to conn23.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seven  
[One]  
Even  
[Eight]  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
Init String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ conn23  
Port Bit Settings  
Description  
There are three menu items available for configuring TID to Modem Mux port bits:  
z Port Data Bits—Defines the number of databits in a data byte.  
z Port Stop Bits—Defines the number of stop bits for TID to Modem Mux. A stop bit  
is an extra bit at the end of an asynchronous character that helps the receiver  
recognize the end of the character.  
z Port Parity—Defines parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of  
data have been altered during data transmission.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for all menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 02*Port Data Bits, enter 2,to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
4. For 03*Port Stop Bits, enter 3,to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
5. For 04*Port Parity, enter 4,to select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
This example displays:  
z 02*Port Data Bits set to 7  
z 03*Port Stop Bits set to 1  
z 04*Port Parity set to Even.  
>4,Even  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------Even  
4-30  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the System Menu, select TID to Modem Mux. The TID to Modem Mux  
Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
4. For Port Data Bits, select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
5. For Port Stop Bits, select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
6. For Port Parity, select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
This example displays:  
z Port Data Bits set to 7  
z Port Stop Bits set to 1  
z Port Parity set to Even.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Seven]  
[One]  
[Even]  
Eight  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
None  
TID to Route  
Description  
This menu item defines the string that represents the TID to be routed to the Modem  
Mux link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 01 TID to route, enter 1,and the desired TID. Maximum length is 20  
characters.  
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.  
>1 columbus-oh  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
COLUMBUS-OH  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
4-31  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For TID to route, enter the desired TID. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... COLUMBUS-OH  
4-32  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
Time Configuration  
AI296 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP is a time protocol  
that maintains a common time among Internet hosts.  
Note: Time configuration options are only available when AI296 is operating in  
standalone mode.  
The following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
Daylight Savings Time  
Description  
There are eight menu items available for configuring Daylight Savings Time:  
z Start On and End On—Configures the numbered day to start or end Daylight  
Savings Time.  
z Start Day and End Day—Configures the day of the week to start or end Daylight  
Savings Time.  
z Start Month and End Month—Configures the month to start or end Daylight Savings  
Time.  
z Start Hour and End Hour—Configures the hour of the day to start or end Daylight  
Savings Time.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. From the System Menu, select Time Menu. The Time Menu appears.  
3. For Daylight Saving Time on this host is, select Enabled or Disabled.  
4. For Start On, select the day number in the month that Daylight Savings Time will  
start.  
5. For Start Day, select the day that Daylight Savings Time will start.  
6. For Start Month, select the month that Daylight Savings Time will start.  
4-33  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
7. For Start Hour, select the hour that Daylight Savings Time will start.  
8. For End On, select the day number in the month that Daylight Savings Time will  
end.  
9. For End Day, select the day that Daylight Savings Time will end.  
10. For End Month, select the month that Daylight Savings Time will end.  
11. For End Hour, select the hour that Daylight Savings Time will end.  
This following example displays:  
z Daylight Saving Time on this host is set to Enabled  
z Start On set to Second  
z Start Day set to Sun  
z Start month set to 3  
z Start Hour set to 2  
z End On set to First  
z End Day set to Sun  
z End month set to 11  
z End Hour set to 2.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00  
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .  
First  
[Sun] Mon  
[Enabled]  
Third Fourth  
Wed Thur  
Disabled  
Last  
Start On . . . . . . . . .  
Start Day . . . . . .  
[Second]  
Tue  
Fri  
Sat  
Start Month (1-12, 1=Jan, 12=Dec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Start Hour (0-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
End On  
End Day  
. . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
[First]  
[Sun] Mon  
Second  
Tue  
Third  
Wed  
Fourth  
Thur Fri  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Last  
Sat  
End Month (1-12, 1=Jan, 12=Dec)  
End Hour (0-23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
SNTP Settings  
Description  
SNTP is a time protocol that maintains a common time among Internet hosts. There  
are 4 menu items available for configuring SNTP settings:  
z SNTP client on this host is—Enables or disables SNTP. If Enabled is selected, the  
system attempts to contact the primary and secondary SNTP servers for the exact  
time. If AI296 is unable to contact either the primary or secondary SNTP server, it  
uses the local time maintained by AI296. If Disabled is selected, the system uses  
the local time maintained by AI296.  
4-34  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
z Primary SNTP Server—Defines the IP address of the first SNTP server from which  
AI296 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.  
z Secondary SNTP Server—Defines the IP address of the second SNTP server from  
which AI296 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.  
Note: The SNTP client must be enabled before the primary or secondary SNTP  
server can be defined.  
z SNTP Poll Interval (minutes)—Defines the time interval (in minutes) for AI296 to  
poll the SNTP servers.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for SNTP client on this host is  
Data for Primary SNTP Server, Secondary SNTP Server, and SNTP Poll Interval (minutes)  
settings  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For SNTP client on this host is, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.  
3. For Primary SNTP Server, enter the primary server IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
4. For Secondary SNTP Server, enter the secondary server IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
5. For SNTP Poll Interval (minutes), enter the time in minutes for the SNTP servers to  
be polled. The default is 10.  
This following example displays:  
z SNTP client on this host is set to Enabled  
z Primary SNTP Server set to 12.43.167.59  
z Secondary SNTP Server set to 12.43.167.60  
z SNTP Poll Interval (minutes) set to 7.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00  
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
SNTP client on this host is . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Primary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.59  
Secondary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.60  
SNTP Poll Interval (minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 7  
4-35  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
Time Zone  
Description  
This menu item configures the time zone for AI296 to use. The configured value  
represents the number of hours you are from UTC.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm), enter the time zone you want AI296 to use:  
z
For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time  
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.  
z
z
For hh, enter the number of hours.  
For mm, enter the number of minutes.  
Note: The time entered is the number of hours you are from UTC. For example,  
if you are located in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, you would  
enter -05:00 in this field. This indicates that you are 5 hours behind UTC.  
This example displays a time zone configuration of -05:00.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-05:00  
4-36  
 
k
5
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring the encapsulation of the IP protocol over X.25  
(IXE) networks.  
Guide to this Chapter  
5-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Configuration Overview  
Configuration Overview  
AI296 supports encapsulation of the IP protocol over X.25 (IXE) networks. The local  
AI296 wraps IP packets (either control or data packets) inside of X.25 frames and  
sends them across the X.25 network. The remote AI296 receives the X.25 frames and  
unwraps the IP packets.  
To allow IP traffic to run over an X.25 network, the network must be configured to  
support IP over X.25 encapsulation. To do this, complete the following tasks:  
z
Configure and verify the X.25 SVC links. Refer to section SVC Configuration  
Settings on page 6-90 for information about configuring X.25 SVC links.  
z
z
z
Create IP subnets and IP over X.25 remote pairs.  
Create IP static routing table entries (optional).  
Reset AI296.  
Before Configuration  
In order for the TCP/IP stack to know where to route incoming packets, an appropriate  
subnet must be configured. IP addresses and subnets must be assigned to the local  
and remote sides of the X.25 link (also called "doorway"). X.121 addresses are then  
assigned to the local and remote sides. After this, a static route can be setup through  
the IXE link to the remote doorway IP address. Refer to the example in Figure 5-1 on  
page 5-2 for an illustration of how to configure IP over X.25.  
Local AI296  
IP address: 198.127.1.196  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Remote AI296  
IP address: 198.30.2.196  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Link Numbers  
Local IXE doorway  
11  
address: 20.0.0.1  
Remote IXE doorway  
address: 20.0.0.2  
8
Local IXE doorway  
X.121 address:  
3035550005  
Remote IXE doorway  
X.121 address:  
6065550008  
IXE subnet mask:  
255.255.255.0  
IXE subnet mask:  
255.255.255.0  
IP Tunnel  
within X.25  
Figure 5-1 IXE Example  
5-2  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Local Settings  
Local Settings  
IXE can be configured using either one local and one remote AI296 or one local AI296  
and a router that supports IP over X.25. The following configuration components are  
available:  
z
z
z
Local IP Address for this Subnet  
Description  
This menu item configures the local IXE doorway address for the subnet.  
Note: This address is not the same as the local AI296 IP address.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.13. This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over  
X.25 subnets.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.13, enter a value (02 through 11) associated with the IP over  
X.25 subnet to be configured. Menu 4.2.11.13.1 appears.  
3. For 01 Local IP address for this subnet, enter the subnet IP address value. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
This example displays 01 Local IP address for this subnet set to 24.35.132.67.  
>1,24.35.132.67  
Menu 4.2.11.13.1  
01 Local IP address for this subnet-----------------------------024.035.132.067  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu.  
2. From the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu, select Add. The IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit  
Menu appears.  
3. For Local IP Address for this Subnet, enter the subnet IP address value.  
5-3  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Local Settings  
This example displays Local IP Address for this Subnet set to 24.35.132.67.  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit Menu  
Local IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . .......... 24.35.132.67  
Local IP Subnet Mask  
Description  
This menu item configures the local IXE doorway IP subnet mask.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.13. This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over  
X.25 subnets.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.13, enter a value (02 through 11) associated with the IP over  
X.25 subnet to be configured. Menu 4.2.11.13.1 appears.  
3. For 02 Local IP Mask for this subnet, enter the subnet IP subnet mask value. The  
default is 255.255.255.252.  
This example displays 02 Local IP Mask for this subnet set to 255.255.0.0.  
>2,255.255.0.0  
Menu 4.2.11.13.1  
01 Local IP address for this subnet-----------------------------024.035.132.067  
02 Local IP Mask for this subnet--------------------------------255.255.000.000  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu.  
2. From the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu, select Add. The IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit  
Menu appears.  
3. For Local IP Mask for this Subnet, enter the subnet IP subnet mask value. The  
default is 255.255.255.252.  
This example displays Local IP Mask for this Subnet set to 255.255.0.0.  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit Menu  
Local IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . ............... 0.0.0.0  
Local IP Mask for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 255.255.0.0  
5-4  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Local Settings  
Local X.25 Link Number  
Description  
This menu item configures the local IXE doorway link number.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.13. This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over  
X.25 subnets.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.13, enter a value (02 through 11) associated with the IP over  
X.25 subnet to be configured. Menu 4.2.11.13.1 appears.  
3. For 03 Local X.25 link number, enter 3,and the link number. Valid values are 1 to  
16. The default is 1.  
This example displays 03 Local X.25 link number set to 12.  
>3,12  
Menu 4.2.11.13.1  
01 Local IP address for this subnet-----------------------------024.035.132.067  
02 Local IP Mask for this subnet--------------------------------255.255.000.000  
03 Local X.25 link number----------------------------------------------------12  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu.  
2. From the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu, select Add. The IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit  
Menu appears.  
3. For Local X.25 link number, enter the link number. The default is 1.  
This example displays Local X.25 link number set to 12.  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit Menu  
Local IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . ............... 0.0.0.0  
Local IP Mask for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 255.255.255.252  
Local X.25 link number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
5-5  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Remote Settings  
Remote Settings  
IXE can be configured using either one local and one remote AI296 or one local AI296  
and a router that supports IP over X.25. The following configuration components are  
available:  
z
z
Remote IP Address for this Subnet  
Description  
This menu item configures the remote IXE IP address for the subnet.  
Note: This address is not the same as the remote AI296 (or router) IP address.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.13. This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over  
X.25 subnets.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.13, enter a value (02 through 11) associated with the IP over  
X.25 subnet to be configured. Menu 4.2.11.13.1 appears.  
3. For 04 Remote IP address for this subnet, enter the remote IP address value. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
This example displays 04 Remote IP address for this subnet set to 36.82.234.54.  
>4,36.82.234.54  
Menu 4.2.11.13.1  
01 Local IP address for this subnet-----------------------------000.000.000.000  
02 Local IP Mask for this subnet--------------------------------255.255.255.252  
03 Local X.25 link number----------------------------------------------------01  
04 Remote IP address for this subnet----------------------------036.082.234.054  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu.  
2. From the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu, select Add. The IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit  
Menu appears.  
3. For Remote IP Address for this Subnet, enter the remote IP address value. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
5-6  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Remote Settings  
This example displays Remote IP Address for this Subnet set to 93.67.158.56.  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit Menu  
Local IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . ............... 0.0.0.0  
Local IP Mask for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 255.255.255.252  
Local X.25 link number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0  
Remote IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . .......... 93.67.158.56  
Remote X.121 Address  
Description  
This menu item configures the IXE remote X.121 address. Each IXE connection must  
have a unique local/remote X.121 address pair. This means there cannot be two  
separate IXE connections in the same AI296 with the same local X.121 address and  
the same remote X.121 address.  
Note: X.121 addresses are assigned per link on AI296, not per SVC.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.13. This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over  
X.25 subnets.  
2. From Menu 4.2.11.13, enter a value (02 through 11) associated with the IP over  
X.25 subnet to be configure. Menu 4.2.11.13.1 appears.  
3. For 05 Remote X121 address, enter 5,and the remote address value. Maximum  
length is 15 characters.  
This example displays 05 Remote X121 address set to 6505550043.  
>5,6505550043  
Menu 4.2.11.13.1  
01 Local IP address for this subnet-----------------------------000.000.000.000  
02 Local IP Mask for this subnet--------------------------------255.255.255.252  
03 Local X.25 link number----------------------------------------------------01  
04 Remote IP address for this subnet----------------------------036.082.234.054  
05 Remote X121 address------------------------------------------  
6505550043  
5-7  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Configuration: Remote Settings  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu.  
2. From the IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu, select Add. The IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit  
Menu appears.  
3. For Remote X121 Address, enter the remote address value.  
This example displays Remote X121 Address set to 6505550043.  
IP Over X.25 Subnet Edit Menu  
Local IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . ............... 0.0.0.0  
Local IP Mask for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 255.255.255.252  
Local X.25 link number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0  
Remote IP Address for this Subnet . . . . . . . . . .......... 93.67.158.56  
Remote X121 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6505550043  
5-8  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: AI296 Link Types  
AI296 Link Types  
AI296 has six configurable link types:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Asynchronous  
Asynchronous links use asynchronous transmission and support multiple baud rates,  
parity types, stop bits, and software flow or hardware control.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
z
Asynchronous PPP  
Asynchronous PPP links use PPP (point-to-point protocol) and asynchronous  
transmission. They support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as  
bridged (BCP) or routed (IPCP) interfaces.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
6-2  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: AI296 Link Types  
HDLC-Bridge  
HDLC-Bridge links run with an HDLC link layer protocol in Asynchronous Balanced  
Mode and bridge Ethernet frames. HDLC-Bridge links can provide clocking or  
synchronize with an external clock.  
See Also  
MLT  
MLT links are designed for interfacing with the metallic loop testing switch application  
found in telephone switch networks. This application consists of proprietary messages  
transported using LAPB. The MLT link type enables the transporting of proprietary  
messages across an IP network. LAPB is terminated on AI296 and the data is  
transported to a remote end point using another transport protocol, such as TCP/IP.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
Synchronous PPP  
Synchronous PPP links use PPP (point-to-point protocol) and synchronized  
transmission. They can provide clocking or synchronize with an external clock.  
Synchronous PPP links support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as  
bridged (BCP) or routed (IPCP) interfaces.  
See Also  
z
z
z
6-3  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: AI296 Link Types  
X.25  
X.25 links provide a synchronous connection to a packet-switched X.25 network. X.25  
links can behave as DTE or DCE and can provide clocking or synchronize with an  
external clock. X.25 links support both PVC and SVC calls and allow configuration of  
a variety of LAPB and X.25 protocol settings.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
z
6-4  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: BX.25 Configuration  
BX.25 Configuration  
AI296 is BX.25 compatible and implements passive links. Passive links are not a part  
of the BX.25 protocol. Once a passive link is active, it uses the BX.25 protocol.  
Notes: BX.25 is supported on only one link per AI296.  
Some BX.25 parameters may vary based on the AI296 installation.  
The following configuration components are available:  
z
z
z
z
BX.25 Configuration Values Usage  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables the use of the values configured in the BX.25  
menu.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 02*Use these configuration values, enter 2to select Enabled or Disabled. The  
default is Enabled.  
This example displays 02*Use these configuration values set to Enabled.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*BX25 Support (Enabled, Disabled)------------------------------------ Enabled  
02*Use these configuration values (Enabled, Disabled)------------------ Enabled  
6-5  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: BX.25 Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select BX.25 Menu. The BX.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Use BX.25 Configuration Values, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is  
Enabled.  
This example displays Use BX.25 Configuration Values set to Enabled.  
BX.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Disabled  
Disabled  
BX.25 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Use BX.25 Configuration Values. . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
BX.25 Modulo  
Description  
This menu item defines a modulo value. A modulo is used by the BX.25 protocol to  
define the value at which the packet sequence numbers will rollover.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 04 Modulo, enter 4,and the desired value. The default is 256.  
This example displays 04 Modulo set to 200.  
>4,200  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*BX25 Support (Enabled, Disabled)------------------------------------Disabled  
02*Use these configuration values (Enabled, Disabled)------------------ Enabled  
03 Sending Unit Number (0 - 9)------------------------------------------------0  
04 Modulo (5 - 256)---------------------------------------------------------200  
6-6  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: BX.25 Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select BX.25 Menu. The BX.25 Menu appears.  
3. For BX.25 Modulo, enter the desired value. The default is 256.  
This example displays BX.25 Modulo set to 150.  
BX.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
BX.25 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Use BX.25 Configuration Values. . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Sending Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
BX.25 Modulo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
BX.25 Support  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables BX.25 module support on a link. BX.25 support  
can only be enabled on one link at a time. When enabling BX.25 support, first disable  
support on all other links.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 01*BX25 Support, enter 1to select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
This example displays 01*BX25 Support set to Enabled.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*BX25 Support (Enabled, Disabled)------------------------------------ Enabled  
6-7  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: BX.25 Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select BX.25 Menu. The BX.25 Menu appears.  
3. For BX.25 Support, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
This example displays BX.25 Support set to Enabled.  
BX.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
BX.25 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
BX.25 Timer Settings  
Description  
The initial BX.25 timer settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Connect timer ST2—Defines the maximum number of seconds that the BX.25  
protocol will wait for a response to a session connect request.  
z Send timer ST3—Defines the data acknowledge timer, which gives the maximum  
number of seconds that the BX.25 protocol will wait for an acknowledgement to a  
Data Request.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 05 Connect Timer ST2, enter 5,and the connect timer value. Valid values are 0  
to 65535. The default is 12.  
3. For 06 Send Timer ST3, enter 6,and the send timer value. Valid values are 0 to  
65535. The default is 18.  
6-8  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: BX.25 Configuration  
This example displays 05 Connect Timer ST2 set to 33 and 06 Send Timer ST3 set to 45.  
>6,35  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*BX25 Support (Enabled, Disabled)------------------------------------ Enabled  
02*Use these configuration values (Enabled, Disabled)------------------ Enabled  
03 Sending Unit Number (0 - 9)------------------------------------------------2  
04 Modulo (5 - 256)---------------------------------------------------------122  
05 Connect Timer ST2 (seconds)--------------------------------------------00033  
06 Send Timer ST3 (seconds)-----------------------------------------------00045  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. From the X.25 Link Menu, select the BX.25 Menu.  
3. For Connect Timer ST2, enter the connect timer value. The default is 12.  
4. For Send Timer ST3, enter the send timer value. The default is 18.  
This example displays Connect Timer ST2 set to 225 and Send Timer ST3 set to 275.  
BX.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Disabled  
Disabled  
BX.25 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Use BX.25 Configuration Values. . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Sending Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
BX.25 Modulo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Connect Timer ST2 (seconds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 225  
Send Timer ST3 (seconds). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 275  
6-9  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Connect Options Configuration  
Connect options configure the AI296 connection parameters. These options are  
available for asynchronous links and asynchronous PPP links. The following  
configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
Alias  
Description  
This menu item specifies an alias name for the connection. When the link connection  
options are satisfied, a call is placed based on information contained in the alias  
name.  
The specified name must correspond to an alias that has been created in the Alias  
Menu. If no alias name is specified and Link Application is set to ALIAS in the AI198  
menu system (AppAlias in the AI296 local menu system), then a default alias is used.  
The default alias is the concatenation of the string asy. with the numeric link number,  
such as asy.3, which indicates link number 3.  
Note: The 02 Alias menu item is used only if 01*Link Application is set to ALIAS  
(AppAlias in the AI296 local menu system).  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 02 Alias, enter 2,and the alias name.  
6-10  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays 02 Alias set to async.4.1.  
>2,async.4.1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Link Application Alias, enter the alias value.  
This example displays Link Application Alias set to async.4.1.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Login  
Destination  
[AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval  
Description  
This menu item defines a value for the call retry interval. If a call fails to connect and  
the retry interval is greater than 0, the link attempts to place the call again after the  
specified number of seconds elapse. This setting has no effect on calls placed to the  
link when the link is the destination and not the call originator. A value of 0 disables  
call retry interval functionality.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 03 Call retry interval, enter 3,and the interval value. The default is 0.  
6-11  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays 03 Call retry interval set to 134.  
>3,134  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Call Retry Interval, enter the desired interval value. The default is 0.  
This example displays Call Retry Interval set to 134.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Connect String  
Description  
This menu item configures the string that is sent after a connection is established. The  
following character values apply:  
z <b>sends a break signal.  
z <n>represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.  
z textrepresents the text value in the string.  
z <p #>represents a pause control sequence. #is the number of tenths of seconds  
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).  
For example, string <b>login<13><p 10><b> sends:  
z
z
z
z
z
A break signal  
Text “login”  
A carriage return  
A 1 second pause  
Another break signal.  
6-12  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 08 Connect string, enter 8,and the connect string.  
This example displays 08 Connect string set to <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>.  
>8,<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134  
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A  
05*Connect when DCD is on---------------------------------------------------OFF  
06*Connect when characters are received------------------------------------- ON  
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF  
08 Connect string-------------------------------------<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Connect String, enter the connect string.  
This example displays Connect String set to <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
On  
[Off]  
Off  
[Off]  
[Off]  
On  
Connect String . . . . . . . . . . . ............... <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
6-13  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Connection Settings  
Description  
The connection settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Connect when DCD is on—Enables or disables link connection when DCD is  
asserted. If Connect when characters are received is also enabled and is satisfied  
first, then Connect when DCD is on has no effect on the link connection.  
z Connect when characters are received—Enables or disables the link connection  
when incoming characters are received. If Connect when DCD is on is also enabled  
and is satisfied first, then Connect when characters are receivedhas no effect on the  
link connection.  
z Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters—When this menu item is enabled,  
Connect when DCD is on and Connect when characters are received are forced off and  
the retry interval is set to 30. If the link application type is set to LOGIN or ALIAS,  
connection will occur as soon as the link is enabled (completely independent from  
the DCD and incoming character status). If the link application type is set to  
DESTINATION, the link will connect immediately when an outgoing call is placed to  
the destination (also completely independent from DCD and incoming character  
status).  
Note: Dial/Connect when DSR is on has no effect on AI296 operation.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 05*Connect when DCD is on, enter 5to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
3. For 06*Connect when characters are received, enter 6to select ON or OFF. The default  
is ON.  
4. For 07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters, enter 7to select ON or OFF.  
The default is OFF.  
6-14  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 05*Connect when DCD is on set to ON  
z 06*Connect when characters are received set to OFF  
z 07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters set to OFF.  
>5  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00030  
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A  
05*Connect when DCD is on--------------------------------------------------- ON  
06*Connect when characters are received-------------------------------------OFF  
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Connect when DCD is on, select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
4. For Connect when characters are received, select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
5. For Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters, select ON or OFF. The default is  
OFF.  
This example displays:  
z Connect when DCD is on set to On  
z Connect when characters are received set to Off  
z Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters set to Off.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
On  
[Off]  
Off  
[Off]  
[Off]  
On  
6-15  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Link Application  
Description  
This menu item configures the link application type. The following options are  
available:  
z Login—Specifies that the link will prompt for a user name and password when  
connected. Upon successful login, a menu appears showing the available  
destination alias names.  
z Destination—Specifies that the link does not accept incoming calls. The link must  
be accessed internally using alias lookup from another link or from a TCP/IP  
connection.  
z Alias (AppAlias)—Specifies that the link will attempt to place a call using direct  
alias lookup without displaying a destination menu. If the link has a link application  
alias name configured, then that name is used. Otherwise, a default alias name  
(ASY.linkNum) is used.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.11.  
2. For 01*Link Application, enter 1to select LOGIN, DESTINATION, or ALIAS. The default is  
LOGIN.  
This example displays 01*Link Application set to DESTINATION.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------DESTINATION  
6-16  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Link Application, select Login, Destination, or AppAlias. The default is Login.  
This example displays Link Application set to Destination.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Login  
[Destination]  
AppAlias  
6-17  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect options configure the parameters that are used when AI296 disconnects.  
These options are available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links. The  
following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings  
Description  
The disconnect inactivity timer settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Disconnect inactivity timer—Defines an inactivity timer value. This value  
establishes a timeout interval after which the link will automatically disconnect if  
no data has been sent or received for the specified number of seconds. This value  
only applies to incoming calls on links that have a retry interval timer setting of 0  
and a link application setting of LOGIN or ALIAS (AppAlias).  
Note: The Disconnect inactivity timeroption must be set to a value greater than  
0 for the inactivity timer to function.  
z Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call—Enables or disables the  
disconnect inactivity timer when the link receives a call.  
z Inactivity timer resets on incoming characters from destination—When enabled,  
incoming characters count as activity on a link (the inactivity timer resets). When  
disabled, they do not count (the inactivity timer does not reset).  
Menu Item Type  
Data for disconnect inactivity timer  
Toggle for Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call and Inactivity timer resets  
on incoming characters from destination  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.12.  
2. For 04 Disconnect inactivity timer, enter 4,and the timer value. The default is 0.  
6-18  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
3. For 05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call, enter 5to select ON or OFF.  
The default is OFF.  
4. For 06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination, enter 6to  
select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
This example displays:  
z 04 Disconnect inactivity timer set to 236  
z 05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call set to ON  
z 06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination set to OFF.  
>12  
Menu 4.2.11.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off--------------------------------------------------OFF  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received---------------------------- ON  
04 Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00236  
05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call------------------------- ON  
06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination----------OFF  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect inactivity timer, enter the timer value. The default is 0.  
4. For Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call, select On or Off. The default  
is Off.  
5. For Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination, select On or  
Off. The default is On.  
This example displays:  
z Disconnect inactivity timer set to 367.  
z Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call set to On.  
z Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination set to Off.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
[Off]  
Off  
Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367  
Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .  
Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
6-19  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Settings  
Description  
The disconnect settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Disconnect when a break character is received—Enables or disables link  
disconnection when a break character is received.  
z Disconnect when DCD off—Enables or disables link disconnection when DCD is not  
asserted.  
Note: AI296 does not consider the DSR state when disconnecting calls.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Both menu items are available for async links  
Menu item Disconnect when DCD off is available for asyncPPP links  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.12.  
2. For 02*Disconnect when DCD off, enter 2to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
3. For 03*Disconnect when a break character is received, enter 3to select ON or OFF.  
The default is ON.  
This example displays 02*Disconnect when DCD off set to ON and 03*Disconnect when a  
break character is received set to OFF.  
>3  
Menu 4.2.11.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received----------------------------OFF  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect when DCD is off, select On or Off. The default is Off.  
4. For Disconnect when a Break character is received, select On or Off. The default is  
On.  
6-20  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
This example displays Disconnect when DCD is offset to Onand Disconnect when a Break  
character is received set to Off for an async link.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
Disconnect String  
Description  
This menu item configures the string the link sends before the link disconnects. The  
following character values apply:  
z <b>sends a break signal.  
z <n>represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.  
z textrepresents the text value in the string.  
z <p #>represents a pause control sequence. #is the number of tenths of seconds  
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).  
For example, string <b>login<13><p 10><b> sends:  
z
z
z
z
z
A break signal  
The text “login”  
A carriage return  
A one second pause  
Another break signal.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.12.  
2. For 07 Disconnect string, enter 7,and the disconnect string. Maximum length is  
80 characters.  
6-21  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
This example displays 07 Disconnect string set to <b>newString<33><p 15><b>.  
>7,<b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
Menu 4.2.11.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received----------------------------OFF  
04 Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00000  
05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call-------------------------OFF  
06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination---------- ON  
07 Disconnect string----------------------------------<b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect String, enter the disconnect string.  
This example displays Disconnect String set to <b>newString<33><p 15><b>.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .  
Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination  
Disconnect String . . . . . . . . . . .............. <b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
6-22  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
General Link Properties Configuration  
General link properties are configurable using menus accessed directly from the link  
configuration menu. The following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Auto Disable Error Limit  
Description  
This menu item disables a link when the rate of errors received on that link exceeds a  
user-specified threshold. This prevents a bad link or cable from streaming enough  
errors to lock up or crash AI296.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For Auto Disable Error Limit, enter the associated item number, a comma, and the  
error limit value. (For example, 9,25000.) The default is 0.  
6-23  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This MLT link example displays 09 Auto Disable Error Limit set to 25000.  
>9,25000  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- MLT  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05 Port speed (0 - 128000 bps, 0 is external clocking)-------------------009600  
06*Hardware Interface (RS232,RS530,V.35)----------------------------------RS232  
07*Sync Port Encoding (NRZ, NRZI)-------------------------------------------NRZ  
08+LAPB Parameters  
09 Auto Disable Error Limit (0-1000000)---------------------------------0025000  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. Select Auto Disable Menu. The Link Auto Disable Menu appears.  
3. For Errors/second limit for auto disable, enter the error limit value. The default  
is 0.  
This example displays Errors/second limit for auto-disable set to 25000.  
Link Auto Disable Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Errors/second limit for auto-disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25000  
Flow Control  
Description  
This menu item enables a receiving device to tell a sending device to stop sending  
data when data is coming too fast and to start sending data when the receiver is  
ready.  
There are two available flow control options for AI296:  
z None—Specifies no flow control.  
z XonXoff—Specifies the flow control option that uses standard ASCII control  
characters to tell a sending device to stop or resume data transmission.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
6-24  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 09*Flow Control, enter 9to select None or XonXoff. The default is None.  
This async link example displays 09*Flow Control set to XonXoff.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)-------------------------------------------None  
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)-----------------------------------------XonXoff  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For SW Flow Control, select None or XonXoff.  
This example displays SW Flow Control set to XonXoff.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 1  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
300  
Autobaud  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
Seven  
115.2K  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Eight]  
[One]  
Even  
Two  
Odd  
[XonXoff]  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
None  
Hardware Interface (Interface Type)  
Description  
This menu item configures the hardware connection used for an AI296 link. The  
following hardware connections are available:  
z RS232—A data transmission standard that defines the characteristics for  
connecting DTE and DCE data communications devices.  
z RS530—A data transmission standard that is similar to RS232, but with support for  
higher data rates (ranging from 20 Kbps to 2 Mbps).  
6-25  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
z V.35—Data transmission standard for a trunk interface between a network access  
device and a packet network.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For Hardware Interface, enter the associated item number to select RS232, RS530, or  
V.35. The default is RS232.  
This asynchronous link example displays 15*Hardware Interface set to V.35.  
>15  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)-------------------------------------------None  
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)-----------------------------------------  
10 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------000  
None  
11+Connect Options  
12+Disconnect Options  
13+RTS/DTR Lead Control Options  
14+Modem Options  
15*Hardware Interface (RS232,RS530,V.35)-----------------------------------V.35  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Interface Type, select RS-232, RS-530, or V.35.  
This example displays Interface Type set to V.35.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
[Down]  
MLT  
[V.35]  
Link Type . .  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
RS-232  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-26  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Interface Mode  
Description  
This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE. DTE is used for  
a communications device (typically a terminal or computer) that is the source or  
destination of signals on a network. DCE is used for a device (typically the modem)  
that establishes, maintains, and terminates a session on a network. It may also  
convert signals for transmission.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
MLT and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.8 for MLT or menu 4.2.11.12.7 for X.25.  
2. For 01*Interface mode, enter 1to select DCE or DTE. The default is DCE.  
This example displays 01*Interface mode set to DTE for an MLT link.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Interface mode (DTE or DCE)----------------------------------------------DTE  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
For MLT links:  
1. Access the MLT Link Menu.  
2. For Interface Mode, select DCE or DTE. The default is DCE.  
This example displays Interface Mode set to DTE.  
MLT Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Up]  
Down  
[MLT]  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
Async  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 1  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DTE] DCE  
6-27  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
For X.25 links:  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. From the X.25 Link Menu, select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Interface Mode, select DCE or DTE. The default is DCE.  
This example displays Interface Mode set to DTE.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DTE]  
01  
DCE  
Link Description  
Description  
This menu item defines a description for a link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 03 Link Description, enter 3,and a description associated with the link.  
Maximum length is 30 characters.  
This example displays 03 Link Description set to New X.25 Link.  
>3,New X.25 Link  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------03  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
03 Link Description------------------------------  
X.25  
New X.25 Link  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link Description, enter a description associated with the link. Maximum length  
is 30 characters.  
6-28  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Link Description set to New X.25 Link.  
X.25 Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Link Type . . Async [X.25] HDLC-Bridge SyncPPP  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-232  
[Up]  
Down  
MLT  
V.35  
AsyncPPP  
[RS-530]  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. New X.25 Link  
Link Mode  
Description  
This menu item defines the mode of operation for an X.25 link as normal, passive, or  
extended:  
z
z
Normal mode is used for normal X.25 service.  
Passive mode allows AI296 to operate with the SCCS application of the AT&T  
5ESS. The SCCS application requires redundant links at the 5ESS. These links  
are called SCC0B and SCC1B. Only one link is active at a time. The 5ESS  
constantly tries to bring up whichever link is idle. If the 5ESS has SCC0B active, it  
will try to bring up SCC1B. If SCC1B comes up, the 5ESS will drop SCC0B and  
send information on SCC1B. Passive mode ensures that either SCC0B or SCC1B  
will be up, but not simultaneously.  
z
Extended mode supports passive link capability to the 5ESS over a TCP/IP  
network. Extended mode ensures that either SCC0A or SCC1A will be up but not  
simultaneously and will temporarily take down the corresponding link if  
connections fail or cannot be placed because the corresponding remote link is  
down.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.1114.12.  
2. For 05*Link mode, enter 5to select Normal, Passive, or Extended. The default is Normal.  
6-29  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays 05*Link mode set to Passive.  
>5  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- X.25  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05*Link mode (Normal, Passive, Extended)------------------------------- Passive  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. From the X.25 Link Menu, select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For X25 Passive Link Mode, select Normal, Passive, or Extended. The default is normal.  
This example displays X25 Passive Link Mode set to Passive.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE  
03  
[DCE]  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4800  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . Normal [Passive] Extended  
Link Number  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of the link being configured.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 01 Link number, enter 1,and the link number. The default is 1.  
6-30  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays 01 Link number set to 3.  
>1,3  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------03  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link to configure, enter the link number. The default is 1.  
This example displays Link to configure set to 3.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link State  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables a link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 04*Link state, enter 4to select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.  
This example displays 04*Link state set to Disabled.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------------------Disabled  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link state, select Up or Down. The default is Down.  
6-31  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Link state set to Down.  
X.25 Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up [Down]  
Link Type  
Description  
This menu item defines the type of link as asynchronous, X.25, HDLC, synchronous  
PPP, asynchronous PPP, or MLT. Refer to section AI296 Link Types on page 6-2 for  
more information about link types.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 02*Link Type, enter 2to select Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, or MLT. The  
default is Async.  
This example displays 02*Link Type set to HDLC.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
HDLC  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link Type, select Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, or MLT. The default is Async.  
This example displays Link Type set to HDLC-Bridge.  
HDLC-Bridge Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [Up]  
Link Type . . Async X.25 [HDLC-Bridge] SyncPPP AsyncPPP  
Down  
MLT  
6-32  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Passive Link with Clocking  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables an X.25 passive link from supplying a clock value  
while the link is in the inactive state.  
Note: Old AT&T 5ESS interface cards (TN983) require clocking with the passive link  
set up.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 13*Passive Link with Clocking, enter 13to select Enabled or Disabled. The  
default is Disabled.  
This example displays 13*Passive Link with Clocking set to Enabled.  
>13  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------05  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
X.25  
03 Link Description------------------------------ X.25 link 5  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------------------Disabled  
05*Link mode (Normal, Passive, Extended)------------------------------- Normal  
06 Port speed (0 - 128000 bps, 0 is external clocking)-------------------009600  
07+X25 LAPB Parameters  
08+X25 Parameters  
09+Virtual Circuits  
10*Hardware Interface (RS232,RS530,V.35)----------------------------------RS232  
11+BX25 Configuration  
12 Auto Disable Error Limit (0-1000000)---------------------------------0000000  
13*Passive Link with Clocking (Enabled, Disabled)---------------------- Enabled  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. From the X.25 Link Menu, select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Passive Link with Clocking, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
6-33  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Passive Link with Clocking set to Enabled.  
\
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
05  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTE  
[DCE]  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . [Normal]  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive  
[Enabled]  
Extended  
Disabled  
Port Data Bits  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of databits in a data byte.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 06*Port Data Bits, enter 6to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
This example displays 06*Port Data Bits set to 7.  
>6  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port data bits, select Seven or Eight. The default is Eight.  
6-34  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Port data bits set to Seven.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
[Down]  
MLT  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
300  
Autobaud  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Eight  
[Seven]  
Port Parity  
Description  
This menu item defines parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of  
data have been altered during data transmission.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 08*Port Parity, enter 8to select None, Odd, or Even. The default is None.  
This example displays 08*Port Parity set to Odd.  
>8  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)------------------------------------------- Odd  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port parity, select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
6-35  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Port parity set to Odd.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
[Down]  
MLT  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
300  
Autobaud  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
[Seven]  
Eight  
[Two]  
[Odd]  
One  
Even  
Port Speed  
Description  
This menu item defines the baud rate for a port.  
Menu Item Type  
Data in the AI296 local menu system  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
Note: The menu configuration has two variations based on the type of link being  
configured.  
To configure the port speed on Async or AsyncPPP links:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For Port speed, enter the associated item number.  
6-36  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Menu 4.2.11.12.5 appears.  
>5  
Menu 4.2.11.12.5  
01 300  
Baud  
02 1200 Baud  
03 2400 Baud  
04 4800 Baud  
05 9600 Baud  
06 19200 Baud  
07 38400 Baud  
08 57600 Baud  
09 115200 Baud  
10 Auto Baud  
Note: 10 Auto Baud is not available for AsyncPPP.  
3. Enter a value from 1to 10to select the port speed. Menu 4.2.11.12 reappears with  
the new port speed selection.  
This example displays 05+Port speed set to 4800.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 4800  
To configure the port speed on an HDLC-Bridge, MLT, SyncPPP, or X.25 link:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For Port speed, enter the associated item number, a comma, and the port speed  
value.  
This example displays 06 Port speed set to 19200.  
>6,19200  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------13  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)----------------  
03 Link Description------------------------------  
HDLC  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------------------Disabled  
06 Port speed (0 - 128000 bps, 0 is external clocking)-------------------019200  
6-37  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Port speed, select 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K, or  
Autobaud. The default is 9600.  
This example displays Port speed set to 4800.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
[Down]  
MLT  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
300 1200  
Autobaud  
2400  
[4800]  
9600  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Port Stop Bits  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of stop bits. A stop bit is an extra bit at the end of  
an asynchronous character that helps the receiver recognize the end of the character.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 07*Port Stop Bits, enter 7to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
This example displays 07*Port Stop Bits set to 2.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------2  
6-38  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port stop bits, select One or Two. The default is One.  
This example displays Port stop bits set to Two.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
[Down]  
MLT  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
300  
Autobaud  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
[Seven]  
Eight  
[Two]  
One  
Sync Port Encoding  
Description  
This menu item sets the binary encoding on a port.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
MLT  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 07*Sync Port Encoding, enter 7to select NRZ or NRZI. The default is NRZ.  
This example displays 07*Sync Port Encoding set to NRZI.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- MLT  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05 Port speed (0 - 128000 bps, 0 is external clocking)-------------------009600  
06*Hardware Interface (RS232,RS530,V.35)----------------------------------RS232  
07*Sync Port Encoding (NRZ, NRZI)------------------------------------------NRZI  
6-39  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the MLT Link Menu.  
2. For Sync Port Encoding, select NRZ or NRZI. The default is NRZ.  
This example displays Sync Port Encoding set to NRZI.  
MLT Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
[Down]  
[MLT]  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
Async  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................... X.25 link 5  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
Sync Port Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NRZ [NRZI]  
DTE  
[DCE]  
Xon Repeat Interval  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables the XON repeat interval. When enabled, AI296  
sends multiple XON characters at the specified interval. Some equipment requires the  
receipt of multiple XONs before sending data after it has received an XOFF.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Aysnc and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.  
2. For 10 Xon Repeat interval, enter 10,and a interval value. The default is 0.  
6-40  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays 10 Xon Repeat interval set to 30.  
>10,30  
Menu 4.2.11.12  
01 Link Number (1-16)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, X25, HDLC, SyncPPP, AsyncPPP, MLT)---------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)-------------------------------------------None  
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)----------------------------------------- None  
10 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------030  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For XON Repeat Interval, enter a interval value. The default is 0.  
This example displays XON Repeat Interval set to 30.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Up  
AsyncPPP  
RS-530  
[Down]  
MLT  
V.35  
Link Type . .  
[Async]  
X.25  
HDLC-Bridge  
SyncPPP  
[RS-232]  
Interface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
300  
Autobaud  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1200  
2400  
[4800]  
9600  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Seven  
[Eight]  
[Two]  
[Odd]  
One  
Even  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
XON Repeat Interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
None  
[None]  
XonXoff  
6-41  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
General PPP Properties Configuration  
The following menu items are available for PPP configuration:  
z
z
z
IPCP Address Settings  
Description  
The IPCP address settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Local IP address—Defines a valid local IP address for AI296.  
z Remote IP address—Defines an IP address for the remote device.  
z Subnet mask—Defines a subnet mask for the link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.2.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 01*Network Control Protocol, enter 1to select IPCP. The default is IPCP.  
3. For 02 Local IP Address, enter 2,and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies  
that the remote device will assign the IP address for AI296. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For 03 Remote IP Address, enter 3,and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies  
that the remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For 04 Subnet Mask, enter 4,and the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.  
6-42  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 01*Network Control Protocol set to IPCP  
z 02 Local IP Address set to 099.045.006.033  
z 03 Remote IP Address set to 106.046.092.004  
z 04 Subnet Mask set to 255.255.255.000.  
>4,255.255.255.000  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------IPCP  
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------099.045.006.033  
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------106.046.092.004  
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.000  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Local IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the  
remote device will assign the IP address for AI296. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For Remote IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the  
remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For Subnet Mask, enter the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.  
This example displays:  
z Local IP address set to 23.230.34.5  
z Remote IP address set to 23.230.34.6  
z Subnet Mask set to 255.255.255.000.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
IPCP Address Parameters  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23.230.34.5  
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23.230.34.6  
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.255.000  
6-43  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Maximum Unit Settings  
Description  
The maximum unit settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Maximum receive unit (MRU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be  
received in a single packet.  
z Maximum transmit unit (MTU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be  
transmitted in a single packet.  
Note: During LCP negotiations on a PPP link, AI296 will advertise the MRU  
configured by the user. If the peer negotiates its MRU with AI296, then the  
MTU on the AI296 side will be set to the peer’s MRU. If the peer does not  
negotiate its MRU, then the MTU on the AI296 side will be set to the value  
configured by the user.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.2.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 05 Maximum Receive Unit, enter 5,and the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for  
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
3. For 06 Maximum Transmit Unit, enter 6,and the byte value. The defaults are 1518for  
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
This example displays 05 Maximum Receive Unitset to 1000and 06 Maximum Transmit Unit  
set to 900.  
>6,900  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP  
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.240  
05 Maximum Receive Unit (128-1568)-----------------------------------------1000  
06 Maximum Transmit Unit (64-1600)-----------------------------------------0900  
6-44  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Maximum Receive Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network  
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
4. For Maximum Transmit Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network  
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
This example displays Maximum Receive Unitset to 1000and Maximum Transmit Unitset to  
900 for an IPCP network control protocol.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
IPCP Address Parameters  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0  
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0  
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.255.240  
Maximum Receive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000  
Maximum Transmit Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900  
Network Control Protocol  
Description  
This menu item defines the network control protocol as BCP or IPCP. BCP configures,  
enables, and disables bridge protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link. IPCP  
configures, enables, and disables IP protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
6-45  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.2.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 01*Network Control Protocol, enter 1to select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.  
This example displays 01*Network Control Protocol for a synchronous PPP link set to  
BCP.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Network Control Protocol, select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.  
This example displays Network Control Protocol set to IPCP.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
6-46  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: LAPB Parameters Configuration  
LAPB Parameters Configuration  
The following settings are used to configure LAPB parameters for an MLT or X.25 link:  
z
z
z
z
Frame Settings  
Description  
Frame settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Frame Level Disconnect—Specifies the level at which a disconnect frame is sent.  
The following options are available:  
z Active—Specifies that a disconnect frame (DISC) is sent and an unnumbered  
acknowledgment (UA) must be received to acknowledge that the link is  
disconnected. Some systems do not acknowledge the DISC frame with a UA  
but send a set asynchronous balanced mode frame (SABM) instead. To bring  
this link up, the system must be configured for a passive disconnect. If a  
remote system fails to respond to a receive ready (RR) frame enough times to  
exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for  
unacknowledged frames (described in section N2 Retry Counter on page 6-  
50), then AI296 sends DISC frames continuously.  
z Passive—Specifies that the DISC frame is not sent. AI296 responds to an  
SABM with a UA. If a remote system fails to respond to an RR frame enough  
times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for  
unacknowledged frames, then AI296 sends SABM frames continuously.  
z Other—Specifies that an immediate disconnect frame (DISC) is sent if an RR  
has been sent enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted  
retransmissions for unacknowledged frames and no reply has been received.  
z Frame Window Size—Specifies the number of frames the link can send before  
receiving confirmation that the first frame has been received correctly. This means  
that data can continue to flow in situations where there may be long turn-around  
time lags without stopping to wait for an acknowledgement.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for frame level disconnect  
Data for frame window size  
6-47  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: LAPB Parameters Configuration  
Link Type Availability  
MLT and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.8 for MLT or menu 4.2.11.12.7 for X.25.  
2. For 02*Frame level disconnect, enter 2to select Active, Passiveor Other. The default  
is Active.  
3. For 03 Frame Window size, enter 3,and the window size. The default is 7.  
This example displays 02*Frame level disconnect set to Passive and 03 Frame Window  
size set to 4.  
>3 4  
Menu 4.2.11.12.7  
01*Interface mode (DTE or DCE)----------------------------------------------DCE  
02*Frame level disconnect (Active, Passive, Other)----------------------Passive  
03 Frame Window size (1 - 7)--------------------------------------------------4  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the MLT or X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select LAPB Menu or X.25 LAPB Menu. The MLT LAPB Menu or X.25 LAPB Menu  
appears.  
3. For Frame Level Disconnect, select Active, Passive, or Other. The default is Active.  
4. For Frame Window Size, enter the window size. The default is 7.  
This example displays Frame Level Disconnect set to Passive and Frame Window Size set  
to 4.  
X.25 LAPB Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . .  
Active  
[Passive]  
Interface Mode  
Description  
This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE. DTE is used for  
a communications device (typically a terminal or computer) that is the source or  
destination of signals on a network. DCE is used for a device (typically the modem)  
that establishes, maintains, and terminates a session on a network. It may also  
convert signals for transmission.  
6-48  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: LAPB Parameters Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
MLT and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.7 for MLT or menu 4.2.11.12.8 for X.25.  
2. For 01*Interface mode, enter 1to select DCE or DTE. The default is DCE.  
This example displays 01*Interface mode set to DTE.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Interface mode (DTE or DCE)----------------------------------------------DTE  
LAPB Timer Settings  
Description  
The LAPB timer settings are configured using three menu items:  
z T1 ack timer—Defines the maximum amount of time from the end of transmission  
to the receipt of an acknowledgment.  
z T2 ack delay timer—Defines the time available from the receipt of a frame until a  
response has to be transmitted.  
z T4 idle timer—Defines the maximum time allowed without the exchange of  
frames on a data link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
MLT and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.7 for MLT or menu 4.2.11.12.8 for X.25.  
2. For 05 T1 ack timer, enter 5,and the timer value. The default is 3000.  
3. For 06 T2 ack delay timer, enter 6,and the timer value. The default is 4000.  
4. For 07 T4 idle timer, enter 7,and the timer value. The default is 25000.  
6-49  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: LAPB Parameters Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 05 T1 ack timer set to 19000  
z 06 T2 ack delay timer set to 20000  
z 07 T4 idle timer set to 50000.  
>7,50000  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Interface mode (DTE or DCE)----------------------------------------------DCE  
02*Frame level disconnect (Active, Passive, Other)---------------------- Active  
03 Frame Window size (1 - 7)--------------------------------------------------7  
04 N2 retry count (0 - 255)-------------------------------------------------150  
05 T1 ack timer (100 - 25500 ms)------------------------------------------19000  
06 T2 ack delay timer (100 - 25500 ms)------------------------------------20000  
07 T4 idle timer (0 - 200000 ms)-----------------------------------------050000  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the MLT or X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select LAPB Menu or X.25 LAPB Menu. The MLT LAPB Menu or X.25 LAPB Menu  
appears.  
3. For T1 Ack Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 3000.  
4. For T2 Ack Delay Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 4000.  
5. For T4 Idle Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 25000.  
This example displays:  
z T1 Ack Timer set to 19000  
z T2 Ack Delay Timer set to 20000  
z T4 Idle Timer set to 50000.  
MLT LAPB Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . [Active] Passive Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
N2 Retry Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
T1 Ack Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19000  
T2 Ack Delay Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20000  
T4 Idle Timer  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50000  
N2 Retry Counter  
Description  
This menu item defines the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for  
unacknowledged frames.  
6-50  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: LAPB Parameters Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
MLT and X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.7 for MLT or menu 4.2.11.12.8 for X.25.  
2. For 04 N2 retry count, enter 4,and the retry count. The default is 20.  
This example displays 04 N2 retry count set to 150.  
4,150  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*Interface mode (DTE or DCE)----------------------------------------------DCE  
02*Frame level disconnect (Active, Passive, Other)---------------------- Active  
03 Frame Window size (1 - 7)--------------------------------------------------7  
04 N2 retry count (0 - 255)-------------------------------------------------150  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the MLT Link Menu.  
2. Select LAPB Menu. The MLT LAPB Menu appears.  
3. For N2 Retry Counter, enter the retry count. The default is 20.  
This example displays N2 Retry Counter set to 150.  
MLT LAPB Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . [Active] Passive Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
N2 Retry Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
6-51  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
Modem Option Configuration  
The following menu items are used for modem option configuration. They are  
available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links:  
z
z
z
Modem String  
Description  
This menu item configures the modem string, which can be any of the following:  
z
z
z
The text sent to a port when an associated link starts or restarts following the  
termination of a call  
The dial string the link to uses to dial the modem automatically once it is  
enabled  
A command that places the modem in auto answer mode so that it is set to  
receive calls  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.14.  
2. For 01 Modem string, enter 1,and the modem string. Maximum length is 80  
characters.  
This example displays 01 Modem string set to 6145553003.  
>1,6145553003  
Menu 4.2.11.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
6-52  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Modem string, enter the modem string.  
This example displays Modem string set to 6145552002.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing Time-out Interval  
Description  
This menu item configures the amount of time in seconds that the modem waits  
before redialing a call when connection is not initially established.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.14.  
2. For 02 Dialing time-out, enter 2,and the timeout value. The default is 30.  
This example displays 02 Dialing time-out set to 10.  
>2,10  
Menu 4.2.11.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Dialing time-out, enter the time out value. The default is 30.  
6-53  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
This example displays Dialing time-out set to 10.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Number of Dial Attempts  
Description  
This menu item configures the number of times the modem redials before terminating  
a call.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.14.  
2. For 03 Number of dial attempts, enter 3,and the number of redial attempts. The  
default is 3.  
This example displays 03 Number of dial attempts set to 15.  
>3,15  
Menu 4.2.11.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010  
03 Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry)------------------015  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Number of dial attempts, enter the number of redial attempts. The default is 3.  
6-54  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
This example displays Number of dial attempts set to 15.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry) . . . . . . . . . . 15  
6-55  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
PPP Authentication Configuration  
The following menu items are available for PPP authentication configuration:  
z
z
z
Local Authentication Settings  
Description  
The local authentication settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Local authentication method—Defines the local authentication method as one of  
the following options:  
z PAP—Specifies the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only  
upon initial link establishment.  
z CHAP—Specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer using a three-  
way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification may  
be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also encrypts  
the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.  
z None—Specifies no authentication will be used.  
z Local PAP/CHAP identity—Defines the user name for local PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
z Local PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines the password for local PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for local authentication method  
Data for local PAP/CHAP identity and local PAP password/CHAP secret  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.1.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.7.  
6-56  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
2. For 02*Local Authentication Method, enter 2to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is  
None.  
3. For 03 Local PAP/CHAP identity, enter 3,and the user name. Maximum length is 24  
characters. The default is applied.  
4. For 04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter 4,and the password. Maximum  
length is 24 characters. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z 02*Local Authentication Method set to PAP  
z 03 Local PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24  
z 04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
>4,documentation  
Menu 4.2.11.12.7  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ TACACS  
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP  
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity-----------------------------  
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret----------------------  
bri24  
documentation  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For Local Authentication Method, select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.  
4. For Local PAP/CHAP Identity, enter the user name. The default is applied.  
5. For Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter the password. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z Local Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z Local PAP/CHAP Identity set to bri24  
z Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option:  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Disabled  
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
RADIUS  
[RADIUS/Fallback]  
TACACS+  
TACACS+/Fallback  
6-57  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
RAS Option  
Description  
This menu item configures the method AI296 uses to obtain ID and password  
information for a link. The following options are available:  
z
Disabling RAS causes AI296 to use local ID and password information to validate  
the ID and password sent from a remote device.  
z
Enabling RADIUS causes AI296 to use the ID and password information  
configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and password sent from the  
remote device.  
z
Enabling RADIUS with fallback causes AI296 to attempt to use the ID and  
password information configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and  
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the RADIUS servers respond,  
AI296 uses the local ID and password (configured in the PPP Authentication  
Menu) for validation.  
z
z
Enabling TACACS+ causes AI296 to use the ID and password information  
configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and password sent from the  
remote device.  
Enabling TACACS+ with fallback causes AI296 to attempt to use the ID and  
password information configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and  
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the TACACS+ servers  
respond, AI296 uses the local ID and password (entered in the PPP  
Authentication Menu) for validation.  
Notes: When connecting to a remote PPP device, ensure that the PPP  
authentication timeout on that device is set to a minimum of 30 seconds. If  
the network latency is high, set that value to a higher number of seconds.  
The TACACS+ server used must support version 1.78 or later of the  
TACACS+ protocol.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
6-58  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.1.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.7.  
2. For 01*RAS Option, enter 1to select DISABLED, RADIUS, RADIUS_FB, TACACS, or TACACS_FB.  
The default is DISABLED.  
This example displays 01*RAS Option set to TACACS for an asynchronous PPP link.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12-2.1  
TACACS  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
To configure RADIUS PPP authentication:  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For RAS Option, select Disabled, RADIUS, RADIUS/Fallback, TACACS+, or TACACS+/Fallback.  
The default is Disabled.  
This example displays RAS Option set to RADIUS/Fallback.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option:  
[None]  
PAP  
CHAP  
Disabled  
RADIUS  
[RADIUS/Fallback]  
TACACS+  
TACACS+/Fallback  
6-59  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
Remote Authentication Settings  
Description  
The remote authentication settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Remote authentication method—Defines the remote authentication method as one  
of the following options:  
z PAP specifies the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only  
upon initial link establishment.  
z CHAP specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer by using a  
three-way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification  
may be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also  
encrypts the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.  
z None specifies no authentication will be used.  
z Remote PAP/CHAP identity—Defines the user name for remote PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
z Remote PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines the password for remote PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for remote authentication method  
Data for remote PAP/CHAP identity and remote PAP password/CHAP secret  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12-2.1.  
For a synchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.7.  
2. For 05*Remote Authentication Method, enter 5to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default  
is None.  
3. For 06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity, enter 6,and the user name. The default is  
applied.  
4. For 07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter 7,and the password. The default is  
applied.  
6-60  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 05*Remote Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z 06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24  
z 07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
>7,documentation  
Menu 4.2.11.12.7  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ TACACS  
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP  
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity-----------------------------  
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret----------------------  
05*Remote Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------CHAP  
bri24  
documentation  
06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity----------------------------  
07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret---------------------  
bri24  
documentation  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For Remote Authentication Method, select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.  
4. For Remote PAP/CHAP Identity, enter the user name. The default is applied.  
5. For Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter the password. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z Remote Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z Remote PAP/CHAP Identity set to bri24  
z Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option:  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Disabled  
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
RADIUS  
[RADIUS/Fallback]  
TACACS+  
TACACS+/Fallback  
Remote Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Remote PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
6-61  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
Quick X.25 Configuration  
The Quick X.25 configuration menu is available only in the AI296 local menu system.  
The following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Frame Settings  
Description  
Frame settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Frame level disconnect—Specifies the level at which a disconnect frame is sent.  
The following options are available:  
z Active—Acknowledges that a link is disconnected when a disconnect frame  
(DISC) is sent and an unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) is received. Some  
systems do not acknowledge the DISC frame with a UA but send a set  
asynchronous balanced mode frame (SABM) instead. To bring this link up, the  
system must be configured for a passive disconnect. If a remote system fails  
to respond to a receive ready (RR) frame enough times to exceed the  
maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames  
(described in section N2 Retry Counter on page 6-50), then AI296 sends  
DISC frames continuously.  
z Passive—Specifies that the DISC frame is not sent. AI296 responds to an  
SABM with a UA. If a remote system fails to respond to an RR frame enough  
times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for  
unacknowledged frames, then AI296 sends SABM frames continuously.  
z Other—Specifies that an immediate disconnect frame (DISC) is sent if an RR  
has been sent enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted  
retransmissions for unacknowledged frames and no reply has been received.  
6-62  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
z Frame window size—Specifies the number of frames the link can send before  
receiving confirmation that the first frame has been received correctly. This means  
that data can continue to flow in situations where there may be long turn-around  
time lags without stopping to wait for an acknowledgement.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for frame level disconnect  
Data for frame window size  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Frame Level Disconnect, select Active, Passive, or Other. The default is Active.  
4. For Frame Window Size, enter the window size. The default is 7.  
This example displays Frame Level Disconnect set to Passive and Frame Window Size set  
to 4.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
02  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . Active  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
[Passive]  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Interface Mode  
Description  
This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE. DTE is used for  
a communications device (typically a terminal or computer) that is the source or  
destination of signals on a network. DCE is used for a device (typically the modem)  
that establishes, maintains, and terminates a session on a network. It may also  
convert signals for transmission.  
6-63  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Interface Mode, select DCE or DTE. The default is DCE.  
This example displays Interface Mode set to DTE.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
DCE  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[DTE]  
Number of PVCs  
Description  
This menu defines the number of PVCs being configured. A PVC is a virtual circuit  
that is permanently available. PVCs differ from SVCs in that an SVC must be  
reestablished each time data is to be sent. Once the data has been sent, the SVC  
disappears. PVCs are more efficient for connections between hosts that communicate  
frequently.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Number of PVCs, enter the number of PVCs you want to configure. The default is  
0.  
6-64  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
This example displays Number of PVCs set to 12.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4800  
DTE  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
Passive  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [128] 256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
Number of PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Packet Settings  
Description  
Packet settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Max packet size—Defines the maximum number of bytes permitted for an X.25  
packet. This limit governs both transmit and receive packets.  
z Packet window size—Defines the packet window size, which specifies the number  
of packets that can be sent before receiving confirmation that the first packet was  
received correctly.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for max packet size  
Data for packet window size  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Max Packet Size, select 128, 256, or 512. The default is 128.  
4. For Packet Window Size, enter the window size. The default is 2.  
6-65  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
This example displays Max Packet Size set to 256 and Packet Window Size set to 5.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
[DCE]  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
Passive  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 [256] 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Passive Link Settings  
Description  
The passive link configuration settings are configured using two menu items:  
z X.25 passive link mode—Defines the mode of operation for an X.25 link as one of  
the following:  
z Normal—Specifies the mode used for normal X.25 service.  
z Passive—Specifies the mode that allows AI296 to operate with the SCCS  
application of the AT&T 5ESS. The SCCS application requires redundant links  
at the 5ESS. These links are called SCC0B and SCC1B. Only one link is  
active at a time. The 5ESS constantly tries to bring up whichever link is idle. If  
the 5ESS has SCC0B active, it will try to bring up SCC1B. If SCC1B comes  
up, the 5ESS will drop SCC0B and send information on SCC1B. Passive  
mode ensures that either SCC0B or SCC1B will be up but not simultaneously.  
z Extended—Specifies the mode that supports passive link capability to the 5ESS  
over a TCP/IP network. Extended mode ensures that either SCC0A or  
SCC1A will be up but not simultaneously and will temporarily take down the  
corresponding link if connections fail or cannot be placed because the  
corresponding remote link is down.  
z Passive link with clocking—Enables or disables an X.25 passive link from  
supplying a clock value while the link is in the inactive state.  
Note: Old AT&T 5ESS interface cards (TN983) require clocking with the passive  
link set up.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
6-66  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For X25 Passive Link Mode, select Normal, Passive, or Extended. The default is Normal.  
4. For Passive Link with Clocking, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
This example displays X25 Passive Link Mode set to Passive and Passive Link with  
Clocking set to Enabled.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
02  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . Normal  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Passive]  
[Enabled]  
Extended  
Disabled  
Port Speed  
Description  
This menu item defines how many bits of data AI296 can transmit per second over a  
link.  
Note: There is an aggregate baud rate limitation of 359 kilobits per second for link  
groups 1 to 4, 5 to 8, 9 to 12, and 13 to 16. For example, the total baud rate  
configured for links 1 to 4 must not exceed 359 kilobits per second. If it does,  
then the AI296 disables the links and reports an error.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
6-67  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
3. For Port speed, enter the baud rate. The default is 9600.  
This example displays Port speed set to 128000  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128000  
DTE  
[DCE]  
SVC Settings  
Description  
SVCs are network connections that are established when transmission is required  
and are disconnected when the session is complete. The SVC settings in the Quick  
X.25 menu are configured using two menu items:  
z SVC low—Defines the minimum LCN used for SVCs.  
z SVC high—Defines the maximum LCN used for SVCs.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For SVC Low, enter the minimum LCN used for SVCs. This number must be higher  
than the number of PVCs. The default is 1.  
4. For SVC High, enter the maximum LCN used for SVCs. This number must be  
higher than the SVC Low value. The default is 1.  
6-68  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
This example displays SVC Low set to 250 and SVC High set to 3149.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128000  
DTE  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
Normal  
[Passive]  
[Enabled]  
Passive  
Extended  
Disabled  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [128] 256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
Number of PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0  
+ PVC Menu  
SVC Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
SVC High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3419  
X.121 Local Address  
Description  
This menu item defines the X.121 address used in the X.25 network. The X.121  
address consists of a three-digit Data Country Code (DCC) plus a network digit,  
together forming the four-digit Data Network Identification Code (DNIC), followed by  
the Network Terminal Number (NTN) of at most ten digits.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For X121 Local Address, enter the value.  
6-69  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Quick X.25 Configuration  
This example displays X121 Local Address set to 59274.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
02  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9600  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
Passive  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [128] 256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 59274  
6-70  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
The following configuration items are available for RTS and DTR lead control  
configuration:  
z
z
DTR State Configuration  
Description  
DTR is an RS-232 signal sent from a computer or terminal to a modem that indicates  
that it (the computer or terminal) is able to accept data. DTR lead control is configured  
using two menu items:  
z DTR connect state—Sets the DTR connect state to ON or OFF. ON sets DTR to on  
while the link is connecting and while it is connected. OFF turns this functionality  
off.  
z DTR disconnect state—Sets the DTR disconnect state to one of the following  
options:  
z ON—Sets DTR to on when the link disconnects.  
z OFF—Sets DTR to off when the link disconnects.  
z TOGGLE—Makes DTR pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is  
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.  
Note: The RTS/DTR lead control options only take effect when the link is configured  
as a destination link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.11.12.13.  
2. For 01*DTR connect state, enter 1to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
3. For 02*DTR disconnect state, enter 2to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.  
6-71  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
This example displays 01*DTR connect state set to OFF and 02*DTR disconnect state set  
to TOGGLE.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.11.12.13  
01*DTR connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON  
02*DTR disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead Control Options Menu. The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options  
Menu appears.  
3. For DTR connect state, select On or Off. The default is On.  
4. For DTR disconnect state, select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.  
This example displays DTR connect state set to Off and DTR disconnect state set to  
Toggle.  
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
DTR connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTR disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On  
On [Off]  
[Toggle]  
Off  
RTS State Configuration  
Description  
RTS is an RS-232 signal that is sent from a transmitting terminal to a receiving  
terminal to request permission to transmit. It is configured using the following menu  
items:  
RTS connect state—Sets the RTS connect state to one of the following options:  
z On—Sets RTS to on when the link is connecting or connected.  
z Off—Sets RTS to off when the link is connecting or connected.  
z FlowControl—Enables RTS to follow the hardware flow control convention.  
6-72  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
RTS disconnect state—Sets the RTS disconnect state to one of the following options:  
z On—Sets RTS to on when the link disconnects.  
z Off—Sets RTS to off when the link disconnects.  
z Toggle—Makes RTS pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is  
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP and SyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access menu 4.2.11.12.13.  
2. For 03*RTS connect state, enter 3to select ON, OFF, or FLOW CONTROL. The default is ON.  
3. For 04*RTS disconnect state, enter 4to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 03*RTS connect state set to FLOW CONTROL and 04*RTS disconnect  
state set to TOGGLE.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.11.12.13  
01*DTR connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON  
02*DTR disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)-----------------------------------OFF  
03*RTS connect state (On, Off, Flow Control)-----------------------FLOW CONTROL  
04*RTS disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead Control Options Menu. The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options  
Menu appears.  
3. For RTS connect state, select On, Off, or FlowControl. The default is On.  
4. For RTS disconnect state, select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.  
6-73  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
This example displays RTS connect stateset to FlowControland RTS disconnect stateset  
to Toggle.  
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTR connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On  
3
[Off]  
[Toggle]  
DTR disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RTS connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RTS disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
[FlowControl]  
Off [Toggle]  
6-74  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
X.25 Parameters Configuration  
The following settings are available for X.25 parameter configuration:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Maximum Packet Size  
Description  
This menu item defines the maximum number of bytes permitted for an X.25 packet.  
This limit governs both transmit and receive packets.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 02*Max packet size, enter 2to select 128, 256, or 512. The default is 128.  
This example displays 02*Max packet size set to 512.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation----------------------------------------------- ON  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------512  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For Max Packet Size, select 128, 256, or 512. The default is 128.  
6-75  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
This example displays Max Packet Size set to 256.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
128  
[Disabled]  
[256] 512  
Packet Window Size  
Description  
This menu item defines the packet window size, which specifies the number of  
packets that can be sent before receiving confirmation that the first packet was  
received correctly.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 03 Packet window size, enter 3,and the window size. The default is 2.  
Note: To access the menu on a Soneplex NE, set Packet window size to 1.  
This example displays 03 Packet window size set to 006.  
>3,6  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation----------------------------------------------- ON  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------512  
03 Packet window size (1-7)-------------------------------------------------006  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For Packet Window Size, enter the value. The default is 2.  
Note: To access the menu on a Soneplex NE, set Packet window size to 1.  
6-76  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
This example displays Packet Window Size set to 6.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Enabled  
128  
[Disabled]  
[256] 512  
Protocol Version  
Description  
This menu item defines the protocol version (year) for the current link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 17*Protocol version, enter 17to select 1980, 1984, or 1988. The default is 1984.  
This example displays 17*Protocol version set to 1988.  
>17  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation-----------------------------------------------OFF  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------128  
03 Packet window size (1-7)-------------------------------------------------002  
04 X121 local address (0-15 decimal digits)------------------------------------  
05 T20 restart timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------------------1750000  
06 T21 call timer (0-3200000ms)-----------------------------------------1000000  
07 T22 reset timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0020000  
08 T23 clear timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0180000  
09 T24 window timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------------2356000  
10 T25 data retransmission timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------1650000  
11 T26 interrupt timer (0-3200000ms)------------------------------------2300000  
12 T28 registration timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------0090000  
13 R20 restart count (0 - 255)----------------------------------------------150  
14 R22 reset transmission count (0 - 255)-----------------------------------025  
15 R23 clear retransmission count (0 - 255)--------------------------------034  
16 R28 registration retransmission count (0 - 255)--------------------------052  
17*Protocol version (1980, 1984, 1988)-------------------------------------1988  
6-77  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For Protocol Version, select 1980, 1984, or 1988. The default is 1984.  
This example displays Protocol Version set to 1988.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
[128]  
[Disabled]  
256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
T20 Restart Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1750000  
T21 Call Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1000000  
T22 Reset Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20000  
T23 Clear Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180000  
T24 Window Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2356000  
T25 Data Retransmission Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1650000  
T26 Interrupt Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2300000  
T28 Registration Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 90000  
R20 Restart Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
R22 Reset Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
R23 Clear Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
R28 Registration Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Protocol Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1980  
1984  
[1988]  
X.25 Counter Settings  
Description  
The X.25 counter settings are configured using four menu items:  
z R20 restart counter—Defines the maximum number of times a reset can be sent  
without receiving reset confirmation.  
z R22 reset transmission counter—Defines the maximum number of times a reset  
can be sent without receiving clear confirmation.  
z R23 clear transmission counter—Defines the maximum number of times a clear  
request can be sent without clearing confirmation.  
z R28 registration transmission counter—Defines the maximum number of times a  
registration request can be sent without receiving registration confirmation.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
6-78  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 13 R20 restart count, enter 13,and the counter value. The default is 1.  
3. For 14 R22 reset transmission count, enter 14,and the counter value. The default  
is 1.  
4. For 15 R23 clear retransmission count, enter 15,and the counter value. The  
default is 1.  
5. For 16 R28 registration retransmission count, enter 16,and the counter value. The  
default is 1.  
This example displays:  
z 13 R20 restart count set to 150  
z 14 R22 reset transmission count set to 25  
z 15 R23 clear retransmission count set to 34  
z 16 R28 registration retransmission count set to 52.  
>16,52  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation-----------------------------------------------OFF  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------128  
03 Packet window size (1-7)-------------------------------------------------002  
04 X121 local address (0-15 decimal digits)------------------------------------  
05 T20 restart timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------------------1750000  
06 T21 call timer (0-3200000ms)-----------------------------------------1000000  
07 T22 reset timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0020000  
08 T23 clear timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0180000  
09 T24 window timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------------2356000  
10 T25 data retransmission timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------1650000  
11 T26 interrupt timer (0-3200000ms)------------------------------------2300000  
12 T28 registration timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------0090000  
13 R20 restart count (0 - 255)----------------------------------------------150  
14 R22 reset transmission count (0 - 255)-----------------------------------025  
15 R23 clear retransmission count (0 - 255)--------------------------------034  
16 R28 registration retransmission count (0 - 255)--------------------------052  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For R20 restart count, enter the counter value. The default is 1.  
4. For R22 reset transmission count, enter the counter value. The default is 1.  
5. For R23 clear retransmission count, enter the counter value. The default is 1.  
6-79  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
6. For R28 registration retransmission count, enter the counter value. The default  
is 1.  
This example displays:  
z R20 restart count set to 150  
z R22 reset transmission count set to 25  
z R23 clear retransmission count set to 34  
z R28 registration retransmission count set to 52.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
[128]  
[Disabled]  
256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
T20 Restart Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1750000  
T21 Call Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1000000  
T22 Reset Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20000  
T23 Clear Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180000  
T24 Window Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2356000  
T25 Data Retransmission Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1650000  
T26 Interrupt Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2300000  
T28 Registration Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 90000  
R20 Restart Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
R22 Reset Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
R23 Clear Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
R28 Registration Transmission Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
X.25 Facilities Negotiation  
Description  
This menu item allows the window size and packet size to be negotiated between  
connections when one end is set differently than the other. When enabled, AI296  
initiates negotiation. When disabled, AI296 does not initiate negotiation, but does  
respond to negotiation attempts made by the remote side.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 01*X25 Facilities negotiation, enter 1to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
6-80  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
This example displays 01*X25 Facilities negotiation set to ON.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation----------------------------------------------- ON  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For X25 Facilities Negotiation, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
This example displays X25 Facilities Negotiation set to Enabled.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . [Enabled] Disabled  
X.25 Timer Settings  
Description  
The X.25 timer settings are configured using eight menu items:  
z T20 restart timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a restart  
confirmation or restart indication after a restart request.  
z T21 call timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of call connected,  
clear indication, or incoming after a call request.  
z T22 reset timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a reset  
confirmation or reset indication after a reset request.  
z T23 clear timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a clear  
confirmation or clear indication after a restart request.  
z T24 window timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for window status  
transmission.  
z T25 data retransmission timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for T25 data  
retransmission.  
z T26 interrupt timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of an interrupt  
confirmation after an interrupt is sent.  
z T28 registration timer—Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a  
registration confirmation after a registration request.  
6-81  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 05 T20 restart timer, enter 5,and the timer value. The default is 180000.  
3. For 06 T21 call timer, enter 6,and the timer value. The default is 200000.  
4. For 07 T22 reset timer, enter 7,and the timer value. The default is 10000.  
5. For 08 T23 clear timer, enter 8,and the timer value. The default is 180000.  
6. For 09 T24 window timer, enter 9,and the timer value. The default is 75000.  
7. For 10 T25 data retransmission timer, enter 10,and the timer value. The default is  
150000.  
8. For 11 T26 interrupt timer, enter 11,and the timer value. The default is 180000.  
9. For 12 T28 registration timer, enter 12,and the timer value. The default is 180000.  
This example displays:  
z 05 T20 restart timer set to 1750000  
z 06 T21 call timer set to 1000000  
z 07 T22 reset timer set to 20000  
z 08 T23 clear timer set to 180000  
z 09 T24 window timer set to 2356000  
z 10 T25 data retransmission timer set to 1650000  
z 11 T26 interrupt timer set to 2300000  
z 12 T28 registration timer set to 90000.  
>12,90000  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation-----------------------------------------------OFF  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------128  
03 Packet window size (1-7)-------------------------------------------------002  
04 X121 local address (0-15 decimal digits)------------------------------------  
05 T20 restart timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------------------1750000  
06 T21 call timer (0-3200000ms)-----------------------------------------1000000  
07 T22 reset timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0020000  
08 T23 clear timer (0-3200000ms)----------------------------------------0180000  
09 T24 window timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------------2356000  
10 T25 data retransmission timer (0-3200000ms)--------------------------1650000  
11 T26 interrupt timer (0-3200000ms)------------------------------------2300000  
12 T28 registration timer (0-3200000ms)---------------------------------0090000  
6-82  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For T20 Restart Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 180000.  
4. For T21 Call Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 200000.  
5. For T22 Reset Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 10000.  
6. For T23 Clear Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 180000.  
7. For T24 Window Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 75000.  
8. For T25 Data Retransmission Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 150000.  
9. For T26 Interrupt Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 180000.  
10. For T28 Registration Timer, enter the timer value. The default is 180000.  
This example displays:  
z T20 Restart Timer set to 1750000  
z T21 Call Timer set to 1000000  
z T22 Reset Timer set to 20000  
z T23 Clear Timer set to 180000  
z T24 Window Timer set to 2356000  
z T25 Data Retransmission Timer set to 1650000  
z T26 Interrupt Timer set to 2300000  
z T28 Registration Timer set to 90000.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
[128]  
[Disabled]  
256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
T20 Restart Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1750000  
T21 Call Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1000000  
T22 Reset Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20000  
T23 Clear Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180000  
T24 Window Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2356000  
T25 Data Retransmission Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1650000  
T26 Interrupt Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2300000  
T28 Registration Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 90000  
6-83  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: X.25 Parameters Configuration  
X.121 Local Address  
Description  
This menu item defines the X.121 address used in the X.25 network. The X.121  
address consists of a three-digit Data Country Code (DCC) plus a network digit,  
together forming the four-digit Data Network Identification Code (DNIC), followed by  
the Network Terminal Number (NTN) of at most ten digits.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.8.  
2. For 04 X121 local address, enter 4,and the local address value.  
This example displays 04 X121 local address set to 43729.  
>4,43729  
Menu 4.2.11.12.8  
01*X25 Facilities negotiation----------------------------------------------- ON  
02*Max packet size (128, 256, 512)------------------------------------------512  
03 Packet window size (1-7)-------------------------------------------------006  
04 X121 local address (0-15 decimal digits)-------------------------------43729  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select X.25 Parameters Menu. The X.25 Parameters Menu appears.  
3. For X121 Local Address, enter the local address value.  
This example displays X121 Local Address set to 59274.  
X.25 Parameters Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
X25 Facilities Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
128  
[Disabled]  
[256] 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 59274  
6-84  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
Virtual Circuit Configuration  
The following settings are available for X.25 parameter configuration:  
z
z
z
Number of PVCs  
Description  
This menu defines the number of PVCs being configured. A PVC is a virtual circuit  
that is permanently available. PVCs differ from SVCs in that an SVC must be  
reestablished each time data is to be sent. Once the data has been sent, the SVC  
disappears. PVCs are more efficient for connections between hosts that communicate  
frequently.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.9.  
2. For 01 Number of PVCs, enter 1,and the number of PVCs. The default is 0.  
This example displays 01 Number of PVCs set to 15.  
>1,15  
Menu 4.2.11.12.9  
01 Number of PVCs (0 - 1024)-----------------------------------------------0015  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Number of PVCs, enter the number of PVCs . The default is 0.  
6-85  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
This example displays Number of PVCs set to 12.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4800  
03  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
Passive  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [128] 256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
Number of PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
PVC Configuration Settings  
Description  
PVCs are configured using four menu items:  
z PVC type—Defines the PVC type as Active, Connect on activity, or Passive.  
z Active—Specifies that the PVC attempts to connect as soon as a link goes up.  
If an immediate connection is not made, the PVC continues trying to connect  
at a specified time interval. This time interval is established by the call timer  
setting.  
z Connect on activity—Specifies that the PVC connects when data is received.  
This PVC remains dormant until it receives a data packet from the network.  
z Passive—Specifies that PVCs make no attempt to connect.  
z LCN low—Defines the minimum logical channel number for the PVCs you want to  
configure.  
z LCN high—Defines the maximum logical channel number for the PVCs you want to  
configure.  
z Timer interval—Defines the timer interval. The timer interval type depends on the  
PVC type. The following timer intervals are available:  
z Call timer interval—Defines the time interval (in seconds) at which an active  
PVC will attempt to establish a connection to a destination.  
z Inactivity timer interval—Defines the amount of time (in seconds) after a  
connect on activity PVC is started before an inactive call is dropped or  
disconnected.  
6-86  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
z Reset timer interval—Defines the time interval (in seconds) at which a  
passive PVC can remain inactive before AI296 resets it. Since passive PVCs  
do not get reset based on a timer, the only configurable value for this setting is  
0. The reset timer interval is only configurable in the AI296 menu system.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for PVC type  
Data for LCN low, LCN high, and the timer interval  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.9.2. This menu displays a summary of all the configured  
PVCs for an X.25 link on AI296.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.11.12.9.2  
PVC Type LCN Range  
CallTmr  
ResetTmr  
InActTmr  
02+  
03+  
04+  
05+  
06+  
07+  
08+  
09+  
10+  
11+  
12+  
13+  
14+  
15+  
17 Display first page  
18 Next Page  
19 Delete entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6-87  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
2. Enter a value (02 through 15) associated with the PVC to be configured. Menu  
4.2.11.12.9.2.1 (the PVC Edit Menu) appears.  
>3  
Menu 4.2.11.12.9.2.1  
01*PVC Type (Passive, Active, Connect on activity)----------------------Passive  
02 LCN Low (* for all LCNs for the link)-----------------------------------0001  
03 LCN High----------------------------------------------------------------0001  
04 RESET Timer Interval (seconds)-----------------------------------------00000  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
3. For 01*PVC Type, enter 1to select Passive, Active, or Connect on activity. The default  
is Passive.  
4. For 02 LCN Low, enter 2,and the minimum LCN value. Valid values are 1 to 1024.  
The default is 1.  
Note: An asterisk (*) configures all LCNs for the link with values defined in menu  
item 4.2.1114.12.9.1.  
5. For 03 LCN High, enter 3,and the maximum LCN value. Valid values are 1 to 1024.  
The default is 1.  
6. For 04 RESET Timer Interval, enter 4,and the reset timer interval value.  
The timer type, range, and default settings depend on the PVC type. Refer to  
Table 6-1 for PVC types, timer types, ranges, and defaults.  
Table 6-1 PVC and Timer Type  
PVC Type  
Timer Type  
Range  
Default  
Active  
Call Timer  
30 to 600 s  
1 to 600 s  
30 s  
1 s  
Connect on Activity  
Inactivity Timer  
6-88  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
Table 6-1 PVC and Timer Type (Continued)  
PVC Type  
Timer Type  
Range  
Default  
Passive  
Reset Timer  
0 s  
0 s  
This example displays:  
z 01*PVC Type set to Connect  
z 02 LCN Low set to 5  
z 03 LCN High set to 15  
z 04 INACTIVITY Timer Interval set to 240.  
>4,240  
Menu 4.2.11.12.9.2.1  
01*PVC Type (Passive, Active, Connect on activity)----------------------Connect  
02 LCN Low (* for all LCNs for the link)-----------------------------------0005  
03 LCN High----------------------------------------------------------------0015  
04 INACTIVITY Timer Interval (seconds)------------------------------------00240  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For Number of PVCs, enter the number of PVCs to be configured. The default is 0.  
4. For SVC Low, enter a minimum SVC value that is higher than the number of PVCs.  
Valid values are from 0 to 4095. The default is 1.  
5. For SVC High, enter a maximum SVC value that is higher than the minimum SVC  
value. Valid values are from 0 to 4095. The default is 1.  
6. Save your work.  
7. From the Quick X.25 Menu, select PVC Menu. The PVC Summary Menu appears.  
8. For Edit PVC, enter the number of the PVC to be edited. This value must be in the  
range of configured PVCs. The PVC Edit Menu appears.  
9. For Low PVC, enter the minimum PVC value.  
10. For High PVC, enter the maximum PVC value.  
11. For PVC Type, select Passive, Active, or ConnectOnActivity. The default is Passive.  
12. For Timer Value, select the timer interval value.  
6-89  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
The timer type, range, and default settings depend on the PVC type. Refer to  
Table 6-2 for PVC types, timer types, ranges, and defaults.  
Table 6-2 PVC and Timer Type  
PVC Type  
Timer Type  
Range  
Default  
Active  
Call Timer  
30 to 600 s  
1 to 600 s  
0 s  
30 s  
1 s  
Connect on Activity  
Passive  
Inactivity Timer  
Reset Timer  
0 s  
This example displays:  
z Low PVC set to 30  
z High PVC set to 50  
z PVC Type set to Active  
z Timer Value set to 230.  
PVC Edit Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Low PVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 30  
High PVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 50  
PVC Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Timer Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Passive  
[Active]  
ConnectOnActivity  
SVC Configuration Settings  
Description  
SVCs are network connections that are established when transmission is required  
and are disconnected when the session is complete. The SVC settings are configured  
using the following menu items:  
z Incoming only SVC low—Defines the minimum LCN used for incoming only SVCs.  
z Incoming only SVC high—Defines the maximum LCN used for incoming only SVCs.  
z Two-way SVC low—Defines the minimum LCN used for an SVC.  
z Two-way SVC high—Defines the maximum LCN used for an SVC.  
z Outgoing only SVC low—Defines the minimum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs.  
AI296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs greater than the maximum PVC  
and/or two-way SVC.  
z Outgoing only SVC high—Defines the maximum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs.  
AI296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs.  
6-90  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
X.25  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.11.12.9.  
2. For 03 Incoming only SVC low, enter 3,and the minimum LCN used for incoming  
only SVCs. The default is 0.  
3. For 04 Incoming only SVC high, enter 4,and the maximum LCN used for incoming  
only SVCs. The default is 0.  
Important: AI296 can only receive calls on incoming only SVCs that are greater  
than the maximum PVC.  
4. For 05 Two-way SVC low, enter 5,and the minimum LCN used for an SVC. The  
default is 1.  
Important: This value must be greater than the number of PVCs and/or  
incoming SVCs.  
5. For 06 Two-way SVC high, enter 6,and the maximum LCN used for an SVC. The  
default is 1.  
6. For 07 Outgoing only SVC low, enter 7,and the minimum LCN used for outgoing  
only SVCs. The default is 0.  
7. For 08 Outgoing only SVC high, enter 8,and the maximum LCN used for outgoing  
only SVCs. The default is 0.  
Important: AI296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs greater than the  
maximum PVC and/or two-way SVC.  
6-91  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Virtual Circuit Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 03 Incoming only SVC low set to 8  
z 04 Incoming only SVC high set to 64  
z 05 Two-way SVC low set to 75  
z 06 Two-way SVC high set to 85  
z 07 Outgoing only SVC low set to 100  
z 08 Outgoing only SVC high set to 150.  
>8,150  
Menu 4.2.11.12.9  
01 Number of PVCs (0 - 1024)-----------------------------------------------0005  
02+PVC configuration  
03 Incoming only SVC low (0 - 4095)----------------------------------------0008  
04 Incoming only SVC high (0 - 4095)---------------------------------------0064  
05 Two-way SVC low (0 - 4095)----------------------------------------------0075  
06 Two-way SVC high (0 - 4095)---------------------------------------------0085  
07 Outgoing only SVC low (0 - 4095)----------------------------------------0100  
08 Outgoing only SVC high (0 - 4095)---------------------------------------0150  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
1. Access the X.25 Link Menu.  
2. Select Quick X.25 Menu. The Quick X.25 Menu appears.  
3. For SVC Low, enter a minimum SVC value that is higher than the number of PVCs.  
The default is 1.  
4. For SVC High, enter a maximum SVC value that is higher than the minimum SVC  
value. The default is 1.  
This example displays SVC Low set to 10 and SVC High set to 15.  
Quick X.25 Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE  
Port speed (0=external clocking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4800  
03  
[DCE]  
X25 Passive Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passive Link with Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Frame Level Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . [Active]  
[Normal]  
Passive  
Enabled  
Passive  
Extended  
[Disabled]  
Other  
Frame Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Max Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [128] 256 512  
Packet Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
X121 Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................  
Number of PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
+ PVC Menu  
SVC Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
SVC High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
6-92  
7
TID Multiplexing  
This chapter provides information on configuring TID multiplexing.  
Guide to this Chapter  
7-1  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: Overview  
Overview  
AI296 supports TID multiplexing, which enables a single call from an OSS to fan out  
into multiple calls to various NEs. The initiating call may be X.25, asynchronous, or  
TCP, but cannot originate from a destination menu. Refer to Figure 7-1 for an  
illustration of TID multiplexing.  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
Sonet NEs  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
TID4  
TID5  
TID6  
X.25 Packet Switched  
Network  
AI296  
OSS  
TID4  
TID5  
TID6  
TID4  
TID5  
Sonet NEs  
TID6  
Figure 7-1 TID Multiplexing Overview  
In Figure 7-1, AI296 takes a single call from an OSS and routes TL1 commands to  
various NEs by means of the TID in the TL1 command. Similarly, AI296 receives TL1  
responses and NE reporting messages from several NEs and routes these messages  
to the appropriate OSS. The call to AI296 from the OSS is a parent call. The calls  
from AI296 to the various NEs are children calls.  
After receiving a TL1 command from the OSS, AI296 checks to see if there is an  
existing connection for each TID. If a connection to the appropriate NE is already  
established, then AI296 forwards the TL1 command to the NE as specified by the TID.  
The following characteristics apply to AI296 when it attempts to connect to an NE:  
z
z
z
If AI296 is unable to establish a connection to an NE, it will buffer the TL1  
command and try to reconnect within 2 seconds.  
AI296 tries to connect up to three times if it cannot immediately establish a  
connection.  
AI296 buffers only one TL1 command for each NE. If a connection is made, AI296  
forwards the buffered command to the NE.  
7-2  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: Overview  
z
z
If a connection is not established after four tries or if AI296 receives a TL1  
command with an unknown TID, the TL1 command gets discarded and a  
message gets logged.  
If the OSS is disconnected from AI296, all associated children calls to the NEs are  
disconnected.  
Tip: To access the configuration menu on a Soneplex NE device, you must set the  
Packet Window Size to 1.  
7-3  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
TID Multiplexing Configuration  
Establish TID multiplexing by configuring aliases for calls that will go through AI296.  
Configure a parent alias to accept the incoming call from the OSS. After doing this,  
configure children aliases to route calls to the various network elements. For more  
information about aliases, refer to Chapter 8: Alias and Call Routing Configuration.  
Configuring the Parent Alias  
Note: Kentrox recommends that you do not use connect-on-activity PVCs to  
establish a parent connection.  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Log in to AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menuto access the Main Menu.  
3. For 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. The alias configuration  
menu appears.  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
4. For 01 Alias name, enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.  
7-4  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
5. For 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available  
translation options.  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. For 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 reappears with SLC routing  
translation selected for menu item 2.  
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03 Destination, enter 3,and the IP  
address of AI296.  
8. For 08 Call data, enter 8,and the parent name.  
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to  
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named  
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.  
9. For 09 App. string, enter:  
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI296 ]  
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid  
values are 1 to 128.  
tid_for_AI296  
Defines the terminal identifier for AI296.  
10. For 10 Called protocol, enter 10,=""  
11. (optional) For 11 Caller's protocol, enter 11,and the caller's protocol.  
12. Save your changes.  
7-5  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
Note: To configure aliases in the AI296 local menu system, AI296 must be in  
standalone mode.  
1. Log in to the AI296 Main Menu.  
2. From the AI296 Main Menu, select Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add Alias. The Alias Edit Menu appears.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
4. For Alias Name, enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.  
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of  
AI296. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias  
translation.  
6. For Call data, enter the parent name.  
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to  
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named  
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.  
7-6  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
7. For Application string, enter:  
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI296 ]  
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid  
values are 1 to 128.  
tid_for_AI296  
Defines the terminal identifier for AI296.  
8. For Called protocol, enter ="".  
9. (optional) For Caller's protocol, enter the caller's protocol.  
10. Save your changes.  
Configuring the Children Aliases  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
AI296 supports a maximum of 512 child connections. These connections can be X.25,  
asynchronous, or TCP/IP.  
To configure the child aliases:  
1. Log into AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menuto access the Main Menu.  
3. For 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. The alias configuration  
menu appears.  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
7-7  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
4. For 01 Alias name, enter:  
parent_name.m  
parent_name  
Defines the name you entered for 08 Call dataduring the parent  
alias configuration.  
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n(specified  
during the parent alias configuration).  
5. For 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available  
translation options.  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. For 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 re-appears with SLC routing  
translation selected for menu item 2.  
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03 Destination, enter 3,and the IP  
address of AI296. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of  
single alias translation.  
8. For 04 Called address, enter 4,and the called address.  
9. For 07 Caller's address, enter 7,and the caller's address.  
10. For 08 Call data, enter 8,and the call data information.  
7-8  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
11. For 09 App. string, enter:  
TID:tid  
tid  
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
12. (optional) For 10 Called protocol, enter 10,and the called protocol.  
13. For 11 Caller's protocol, enter 11,="".  
Configuration in the AI296 Local Menu System  
Note: To configure aliases in the AI296 local menu system, AI296 must be in  
standalone mode.  
1. Log in to the AI296 Main Menu.  
2. From the AI296 Main Menu, select Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add Alias. The Alias Edit Menu appears.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
7-9  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
4. For Alias name, enter:  
parent_name.m  
parent_name  
Defines the name you entered for 08 Call dataduring the parent  
alias configuration.  
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n(specified  
during the parent alias configuration).  
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of  
AI296. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias  
translation.  
6. For Called address, enter the called address.  
7. For Caller's address, enter the caller's address.  
8. For Call Data, enter the call data information.  
9. For Application String, enter:  
TID:tid  
tid  
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
10. (optional) For Called protocol, enter the called protocol.  
11. For Caller's protocol, enter ="".  
12. Save your changes.  
Example Configurations  
The following screens display parent and child alias configurations that do the  
following:  
1. A call comes in on alias 172.16.1.123 at port 1000 (172.16.1.123#1000).  
2. The call fans out into two child calls. 09 App. string in the parent alias  
configuration determines the number of children; in this case, it is noted by TMUX2.  
The children have the following names: TL1DM.1 and TL1DM.2. These names are  
established through 08 Call data in the parent alias configuration. The calls to the  
first child will be X.25 through link 1 with X.121 address 123456789012  
(X25.1.123456789012). The call to the second child will be X.25 through link 2 with  
X.121 address 987654321098 (X25.2.987654321098).  
7-10  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
3. AI296 forwards all TL1 commands with TIDs NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1, NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2,  
and NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3 through the first child connection. It forwards all TL1  
commands with TIDs NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 and NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2 through the  
second child connection.  
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI198 menu system.  
>11 TL1  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -------------------------------------------------172.16.1.23#1000  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -------------------------------------------------------------TL1DM  
09 App. string -----------------------------------------------------------TMUX2  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------TL1  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
7-11  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI296 menu system.  
Note: To configure aliases in the AI296 local menu system, AI296 must be in  
standalone mode.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ...................................... 172.16.1.23#1000  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . ................................................. TL1DM  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... TL1  
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""  
Application String . ................................................. TMUX2  
Alternate Route . .  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
7-12  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI198 menu  
system.  
>11 =""  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name ----------------------------------------------------------TL1DM.1  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -------------------------------------------X25.1.123456789012  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string --TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
>11 =""  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name ----------------------------------------------------------TL1DM.2  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -------------------------------------------X25.2.987654321098  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -----------------TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
7-13  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI296 menu  
system.  
Note: To configure aliases in the AI296 local menu system, AI296 must be in  
standalone mode.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................... TL1DM.1  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .................................... X25.1.123456789012  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COL  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................... TL1DM.2  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .................................... X25.2.987654321098  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . ....... TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2  
Alternate Route . .  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
7-14  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
If an OSS is not getting a response from an NE, it can send a TL1 retrieve header  
command (RTRV-HDR) to determine if the problem is with the NE or with AI296. The  
parent connection on AI296 responds to RTRV-HDRcommands that have the same TID  
as the one configured for the card.  
Tip: For more information regarding TL1 commands, responses, and formats, refer  
to the Belcore document GR-833-CORE.  
RTRV-HDR  
This command is used primarily as an aliveness check.  
Format  
RTRV-HDR:[ tid ]::ctag;  
Parameters  
tid  
Defines the TID for AI296. Note that the TID and SID are the same.  
ctag  
Defines the correlation tag used to correlate responses to input commands.  
Each input command has a unique ctag. Maximum length is 6 characters.  
Responses include the identical ctag.  
Normal Response Format  
This example displays the format of the response that appears when RTRV-HDRis  
successfully executed:  
<cr><lf><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>  
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>COMPLD<cr><lf>;  
Table 7-1 describes each of the items in the above response format.  
Table 7-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description  
Response Item Description  
cr  
Specifies a carriage return.  
Specifies a line feed.  
lf  
sp  
SID  
Specifies a space.  
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).  
7-15  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
Table 7-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description (Continued)  
Response Item Description  
YY-MM-DD  
HH:MM:SS  
ctag  
Specifies the date.  
Specifies the time of day.  
Specifies the correlation tag.  
COMPLD  
Specifies completion. The Input requirement is satisfied.  
Normal Response Example  
This example displays the response that appears when RTRV-HDR:AI232:12345;is  
executed.  
AI296 97-01-01 05:06:39  
M 12345 COMPLD;  
Error Response Format  
If AI296 receives TL1 commands other than RTRV-HDRwith the same card TID, it  
responds with a deny message. This example displays the deny message format.  
<cr><lf><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>  
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>DENY<cr><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><errcde><cr><lf>;  
Table 7-2 describes each of the items in the above response format.  
Table 7-2 Error Response Format Description  
Response Item Description  
cr  
Specifies a carriage return.  
Specifies a line feed.  
lf  
sp  
Specifies a space.  
SID  
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).  
Specifies the date.  
YY-MM-DD  
HH:MM:SS  
ctag  
Specifies the time of day.  
Specifies the correlation tag.  
Specifies that the input requirement is not satisfied.  
DENY  
7-16  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
Table 7-2 Error Response Format Description (Continued)  
Response Item Description  
errcde Specifies the error code.  
Error Response Example  
This example displays the response that appears if RTRV-HDRfails.  
AI296 97-01-01 05:06:39  
M 12345 DENY  
IIAC;  
Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing  
To view information on TID multiplexed calls and the associated TIDs, use  
diag-tconn. This command displays a list of all connections on the card in the same  
format as diag-conn. However, diag-tconnis not interactive.  
Use this command either from the AI296 shell or through AI198 as a winslc  
command. Refer to diag-tconn on page 9-49 for more information.  
7-17  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
7-18  
8
Alias and Call Routing  
Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring aliases and routing calls on AI296.  
Guide to this Chapter  
8-1  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview  
Overview  
AI296 uses aliases to route calls across the backplane of AIswitch. Each incoming  
call’s routing information must match an entry in the alias table, or else the call is  
rejected. When AI296 is in switch mode, the alias table is stored on AI198. When  
AI296 is in standalone mode, the alias table is stored in AI296’s local memory. For  
more information about alias translation and macros, see sections Call Routing on  
Figure 8-1 displays a typical call processing data flow scenario where AI296 is used.  
AI296 Card A  
IP address  
172.16.30.100  
AI296 Card B  
IP address  
AEPN  
172.16.30.200  
AEPN  
X.25  
TCP  
Incoming  
X.25  
call  
Outgoing  
TCP/IP  
call  
TCP  
X.25  
Incoming  
Outgoing  
TCP/IP  
call  
X25 call to  
X25.2.67891  
Figure 8-1 Call Data Flow  
In Figure 8-1, an X.25 protocol call is coming into AI296 card A and needs to pass  
over the IRB and be sent out AI296 card B. Refer to the figure to follow the flow of the  
call.  
The following events occur if the data flow is from left to right:  
1. The data comes into AI296 card A as an X.25 packet. Refer to X.25 on page 6-4  
for information about X.25  
2. The data travels upstream and is converted into a TCP call.  
3. The data starts downstream through the AEPN protocol option to preserve the  
packetization. Refer to AEPN on page 8-29 for information about the AEPN  
protocol.  
4. The data is sent out AI296 card A over TCP on the IRB.  
8-2  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview  
5. The TCP packet is received by AI296 card B.  
6. The data travels upstream through the AEPN protocol option to preserve  
packetization.  
7. The data packet is converted, travels downstream, and is transmitted out AI296  
using an X.25 protocol with the original packetizing characteristics preserved.  
This is an example configuration in the AI198 menu system for AI296 A:  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name ----------------------------------------------------------TOCARDB  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address ------------------------------------------172.16.30.200 #5000  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol --------------------------------------------------------AEPN  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
8-3  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview  
This is an example configuration in the AI198 menu system for AI296 B:  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -----------------------------------------------172.16.30.200#5000  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address --------------------------------------------------X25.2.67891  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol ------------------------------------------------------AEPN  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
8-4  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Call Routing  
To route calls with AI296, you must configure an alias for a source and destination  
protocol.  
Note: Aliases created in AI198 are not visible to AI296 when it is running in  
standalone mode. However, you can configure aliases in the AI296 local menu  
system when it is in standalone mode.  
Configuring an Alias in the AI198 Menu System  
Note: Specific configuration information about menu items in the following procedure  
To configure an alias in the AI198 Menu System:  
1. Log in to AI198.  
2. At the prompt, type menu. The main menu appears.  
3. To access menu 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. Menu 8 appears:  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
4. For 01 Alias name -, enter 1,followed by the alias name for the incoming (source)  
call.  
AI198 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining  
alias menu items.  
8-5  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard  
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or  
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an  
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).  
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to  
8-12.  
5. To access menu 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears:  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. To select 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 reappears with the SLC  
routing translation configuration items.  
Important: Menu item 04 SLC routing translation is the only valid menu item for  
AI296. Use SLC routing translations to route calls through cards that  
support non-time division subchannel (TDS) connections.  
7. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI296 cards, enter 3,and the IP  
address of the remote AI296.  
8. For 04 Called address -, enter 4,and the the called (destination) address.  
The called (destination) address defines the phone number being called.  
Maximum length is 14 characters. The actual address or an alias macro can be  
entered here.  
8-6  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
9. For 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu, enter 5to toggle between Yes  
and No.  
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.  
10. (optional) For 08 Call data -, enter 8,and the call user data.  
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered  
as an alias macro.  
11. (optional) For 10 Called protocol -, enter 10,and the called protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
12. (optional) For 11 Caller's protocol -, enter 11,and the caller’s protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
13. For 20 Save the changes made, enter 20to save the alias configuration.  
14. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.  
Configuring an Alias in the AI296 Menu System  
Note: Specific configuration information about menu items in the following procedure  
To configure an alias in the AI296 Menu System:  
1. Log in to AI296.  
2. At the prompt, type menu. The AI296 Main Menu appears.  
3. Access the Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
8-7  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
4. From the the Alias Summary Menu, select [Add Alias]. The Alias Edit Menu  
appears:  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
5. For Alias Name, enter the alias name for the incoming (source) call.  
AI296 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining  
alias menu items.  
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard  
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or  
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an  
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).  
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to  
8-20.  
6. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI296 cards, enter the IP address  
of the remote AI296 in the destination field.  
7. (optional) For Called Address, enter the called (destination) address.  
The called (destination) address defines the phone number being called.  
Maximum length is 14 characters. The actual address or an alias macro can be  
entered here.  
8-8  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
8. (optional) For Call Data, enter the call user data.  
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered  
as an alias macro.  
9. (optional) For Caller's Protocol, enter the caller’s protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
10. (optional) For Called Protocol, enter the called protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
11. For Display Alias in Destination Menu, select Yes or No.  
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.  
12. For Alias Location, select Beginningor Endto place the alias at the beginning or end  
of the alias table.  
13. Select <F2> Send to save the changes.  
14. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.  
Arranging Aliases in the Alias Table  
To arrange aliases in the alias table:  
1. From the AI296 Main Menu, access the Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu  
appears:  
Alias Summary Menu  
Find alias:  
[Add Alias]  
[Sort]  
+ alias4  
+ alias2  
+ alias1  
+ alias3  
[Move] [Delete]  
[Move] [Delete]  
[Move] [Delete]  
[Move] [Delete]  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help  
<F4> Close  
8-9  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
2. From the Alias Summary Menu, select one of the following options:  
z
z
Select Sort to sort the aliases alphabetically.  
Select Movenext to the desired alias and move it to the top or bottom of the list,  
or up or down in the list.  
3. Select <F4> Close to exit the Alias Summary Menu.  
Configuring an Alias with X.25 Keep-Alive  
Some devices will go to sleep if no data is received within a certain timeframe. You  
can prevent that by sending a receive-ready (RR) frame periodically on a virtual circuit  
(VC). You can customize the time period by configuring the application string of the  
Alias menu.  
1. Access the Alias Edit Menu. (For information about accessing the Alias Edit  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . .............................................. X.25.4.1  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................... 10.39.3.89#7  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . ........................................... X25KA -s 20  
Alternate Route . .  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
8-10  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
2. In the Alias Edit Menu, select Application String and enter the X-25 keep-alive  
string as follows:  
X25KA [-s | -d] period  
where:  
X25KA  
Notifies the 296 that this is the X-25 keep-alive feature.  
period  
The period between each RR on the VC. This value is in tenths of  
second. In the example above, an RR would be sent every 2  
seconds.  
-d, -s -  
If the -dflag is given, the destination will send out the RRs if it is an  
X.25 link. If the -sflag is given, then only the source side of the  
connection will send out the RRs if it is an X.25 link. If neither is  
given, then it will send out RRs on the side that is an X.25 link and  
both if both are X.25 links.  
8-11  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
The following parameters are referred to in the tables:  
call_data  
Defines the call data. Maximum length is 16 characters.  
called_address  
caller_address  
ip_address  
Defines the address being called. Maximum length is 14  
characters.  
Defines the address of the caller. Maximum length is 14  
characters.  
Defines the IP address in dotted decimal format. The #symbol  
must be entered as a field separator between the ip_address  
field and the tcp_port_numberfield.  
lcn  
Defines the logical channel number.  
Defines the number of the serial link.  
link_number  
tcp_port_number  
Defines the TCP port number. Valid values are from 1 to  
65535.  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI198 Menu System  
The following tables are organized according to source protocols. Match the  
destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item  
entries:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
8-12  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-1 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
Async  
01  
04  
08  
01  
04  
PVC  
ASY.link_number  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
X.25 SVC  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address  
| call_user_data }  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
Async  
X.25 PVC  
TCP  
01  
04  
08  
01  
04  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
ASY.link_number  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
8-13  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-2 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item Information  
ASY.link_number  
Async,  
Async  
TL1,  
Async  
X.25 SVC  
with X.29  
break  
01  
04  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
packetized  
on a CR  
(or .02 s  
idle time)  
| call_user_data }  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
11  
The following options are available:  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1 (Refer to TL1 on  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
10  
01  
04  
08  
11  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
ASY.link_number  
Async,  
Async  
TL1,  
Async  
packetized  
on a CR  
(or .02 s  
idle time)  
X.25 PVC  
with X.29  
break  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
The following options are available:  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1 (Refer to TL1 on  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
10  
01  
04  
10  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
TCP with  
telnet break  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
8-14  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-3 X.25 SVC Source Without Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X.25 SVC X.25 SVC  
01  
04  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
| call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
X.25 SVC X.25 PVC  
01  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
04  
08  
01  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 SVC TCP  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
04  
01  
X.25 SVC AI193-TX  
TCP with N  
protocol  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
04  
10  
01  
option  
AEP (Refer to AEP on page 8-29)  
X.25 SVC Async  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
04  
08  
PVC  
ASY.link_number  
8-15  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-4 X.25 SVC Source With Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X.25 SVC,  
X.25 SVC  
and reply to  
X.29 break  
TCP with  
telnet break  
01  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
04  
11  
10  
01  
X.25 SVC  
AI193-TX  
TCP with N  
protocol  
option  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
04  
Called  
AEP (Refer to AEP on page 8-29)  
protocol  
X.25 SVC,  
X.25 SVC  
with TL1  
packetizing with async  
and X.29  
break  
Async with  
asyncbreak,  
Async TL1  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
Called  
address  
PVC  
break,  
Async  
packetized  
on CR (or  
.02 s idle  
time)  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
z
SVC: PAD  
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
SVC with TL1: PAD TL1  
z
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30 and  
Called  
The following options are available:  
protocol  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1  
(Refer to TL1 on page 8-33)  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
8-16  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-5 X.25 PVC Source Without Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
| call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC TCP  
X.25 PVC Async  
Alias name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Table 8-6 X.25 PVC Source With Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination  
Menu Item Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC,  
X.25 PVC  
and reply to  
X.29 break  
TCP with  
telnet break  
Alias name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
address  
Caller’s  
protocol  
Called  
protocol  
8-17  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-6 X.25 PVC Source With Breaks (AI198) (Continued)  
Source  
Destination  
Menu Item Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC,  
X.25 PVC  
with TL1  
packetizing  
and X.29  
break  
Async with  
async break,  
Async TL1  
with async  
break, Async  
packetizedon  
a CR  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
(or .02 s idle  
time)  
z
X.25 PVC: PAD  
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
X.25 PVC TL1: PAD TL1  
z
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30 and  
Called  
The following options are available:  
protocol  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1  
(Refer to TL1 on page 8-33)  
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
z
Table 8-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address|  
call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
8-18  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198) (Continued)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
TCP  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Table 8-8 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 SVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address|  
call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 PVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
8-19  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-8 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198) (Continued)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async with  
Alias name  
async break  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI296 Menu System  
The following tables are organized according to source protocols. Match the  
destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item  
entries:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Table 8-9 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI296)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ASY.link_number  
PVC  
Async  
Async  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
8-20  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-9 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI296) (Continued)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address  
| call_user_data }  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
Async  
X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
TCP  
Alias name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
8-21  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-10 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI296)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item Information  
ASY.link_number  
Async,  
Async  
TL1,  
X.25 SVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
Async  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
packetized  
on a CR  
(or.02 s  
idle time)  
| call_user_data }  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1 (Refer to TL1 on  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
ASY.link_number  
Async,  
Async  
TL1,  
Async  
X.25 PVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
packetized  
on a CR  
(or .02 s  
idle time)  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1 (Refer to TL1 on  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
ASY.link_number  
Async  
TCP with  
Alias name  
telnet break  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
Called  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
protocol  
8-22  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-11 X.25 SVC Source Without Breaks (AI296)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X.25 SVC X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
| call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
X.25 SVC X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
Called  
PVC  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
X.25 SVC TCP  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
X.25 SVC AI193-TX  
TCP with N  
protocol  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
option  
Called  
AEP (Refer to AEP on page 8-29)  
protocol  
X.25 SVC Async  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
8-23  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-12 X.25 SVC Source With Breaks (AI296)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X.25 SVC,  
X.25 SVC  
and reply to  
X.29 break  
TCP with  
telnet break  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
address  
Caller’s  
protocol  
Called  
protocol  
X.25 SVC  
AI193-TX  
TCP with N  
protocol  
option  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
Called  
AEP (Refer to AEP on page 8-29)  
protocol  
X.25 SVC,  
X.25 SVC  
with TL1  
packetizing with async  
and X.29  
break  
Async with  
asyncbreak,  
Async TL1  
Alias name  
Call user data or called address or  
caller’s address  
Called  
address  
PVC  
break,  
Async  
packetized  
on CR (or  
.02 s idle  
time)  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
z
SVC: PAD  
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
SVC with TL1: PAD TL1  
z
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30 and  
Called  
The following options are available:  
protocol  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1  
(Refer to TL1 on page 8-33)  
z
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
8-24  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-13 X.25 PVC Source Without Breaks (AI296)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{caller_address  
| call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC TCP  
X.25 PVC Async  
Alias name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Called  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Table 8-14 X.25 PVC Source With Breaks (AI296)  
Source  
Destination  
Menu Item Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC,  
X.25 PVC  
and reply to  
X.29 break  
TCP with  
telnet break  
Alias name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
address  
Caller’s  
protocol  
Called  
protocol  
8-25  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-14 X.25 PVC Source With Breaks (AI296) (Continued)  
Source  
Destination  
Menu Item Information  
X25.link_number.lcn  
X.25 PVC,  
X.25 PVC  
with TL1  
packetizing  
and X.29  
break  
Async with  
async break,  
Async TL1  
with async  
break, Async  
packetizedon  
a CR  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
The following options are available:  
(or .02 s idle  
time)  
z
X.25 PVC: PAD  
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
X.25 PVC TL1: PAD TL1  
z
(Refer to PAD on page 8-30 and  
Called  
The following options are available:  
protocol  
z
Async: leave blank  
z
Async TL1: TL1  
(Refer to TL1 on page 8-33)  
Async packetized: PKT -P13 -I2  
(Refer to PKT on page 8-32)  
z
Table 8-15 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI296)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 SVC  
Alias name  
Called  
The following options are available:  
address  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address|  
call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 PVC  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
8-26  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-15 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI296) (Continued)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
TCP  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async  
Alias name  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Table 8-16 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI296)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 SVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
The following options are available:  
z X25.link_number.called_address  
z X25.link_number.{ caller_address|  
call_user_data}  
Note: called_addressmust be a valid  
X.121 address.  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
X.25 PVC  
with X.29  
break  
Alias name  
Called  
address  
PVC  
X25.link_number.lcn  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
Called  
PAD (Refer to PAD on page 8-30)  
protocol  
8-27  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
Table 8-16 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI296) (Continued)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async with  
Alias name  
async break  
Called  
PVC  
address  
ASY.link_number  
Call data  
Caller’s  
protocol  
TN (Refer to TN on page 8-35)  
8-28  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Protocol Processing Modules  
Protocol processing modules are used to process data as it passes though AI296.  
The following topics are covered in this section:  
z
z
Module Types  
The following module types are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol (AEP)  
Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol with network option (AEPN)  
Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol extension (AEPX)  
Asynchronous protocol processing module (ASY)  
BX.25 network module (BX25NM)  
BX.25 session layer module (BX25S)  
End to end reset (ETER)  
Packet assembler disassembler (PAD and XXX PAD)  
Packetizing module (PKT)  
Record boundary preservation (RBP)  
Translation language one (TL1)  
Telnet module (TN)  
AEP  
The Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol works with messages traveling  
between X.25 and TCP/IP protocols. AEP allows for packet preservation of X.25 data  
when transport is over a TCP/IP network. This protocol keeps packet boundaries  
intact, which is useful for X.25 applications that are highly sensitive to packet integrity.  
AEPN  
The Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol with the network option is used for  
messages traveling between X.25 and TCP/IP protocols. In addition to the services  
provided by the AEP protocol, the AEPN also passes X.25 Q-bit information over a  
TCP/IP connection. AEPN also handles special information such as break signals.  
8-29  
       
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
AEPX  
Applied Innovation encapsulation extension is similar to AEPN, but adds the ability to  
transport X.25 interrupt/reset packets and interrupt/reset confirmation packets  
through TCP.  
ASY  
This module takes a single argument that specifies the string to be transmitted on the  
outgoing connection when a call is placed. The string typically contains a modem dial  
sequence.  
Optional Parameters  
Echo  
Causes local echo from an ASY port.  
Edit  
Buffers calls for line editing and sends lines as a whole when ENTER is  
pressed. Lines can be edited by using BACKSPACE .  
BX25NM  
The BX.25 network module is used to translate to and from the AEPN module and the  
BX25S module. Typically, this module is used with the BX25S module. Refer to BX.25  
Configuration on page 6-5 for information about configuring BX.25 parameters.  
BX25S  
The BX.25 session layer module provides the session layer to X.25 that is required for  
the AMATPS protocol. Typically, this module is used with the BX25NM module. Refer  
to BX.25 Configuration on page 6-5 for information about configuring BX.25  
parameters.  
ETER  
End to end reset is used on a PVC in the data transfer state to pass reset requests  
without confirmation. The endpoint is responsible for confirming the reset which is  
also passed through. This option works only with PVCs and is used on the X.25 side  
of the connection.  
PAD  
Packet assembler disassembler works with messages traveling between X.25 and  
asynchronous protocols. The X.25 protocol does not use break signals, but the  
asynchronous protocol does. PAD converts X.25 Q-bits into asynchronous breaks,  
and vice versa.  
Note: This protocol processing module can be put on an X.25 data stream.  
8-30  
           
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Defaults  
Passes breaks upstream  
Passes breaks downstream  
Sends no reply to breaks  
Optional Parameters  
-U  
Prevents the PAD protocol from passing breaks upstream.  
-D  
Prevents the PAD protocol from passing breaks downstream.  
Causes the PAD protocol to reply to X.25 breaks.  
-R  
-7:21  
Causes the X.3 parameter to behave like X.25. This option sends an  
interrupt packet (an indication of a break PAD message) and discards data  
to the terminal.  
-M  
Enables Macstar compatibility.  
Example  
PAD -U  
Provides PAD break handling, but prevents the break from being  
propagated upstream.  
XXX PAD  
The packet assembler disassembler is a device that collects data from a group of  
terminals and outputs the data in packets (data organized in a special format). It can  
also take the data packets from a host and turn them into a character stream that can  
be transmitted to the terminals. The XXX PAD is defined by the following values:  
z
X.3—Specifies the parameter for terminal handling functions such as baud rate,  
flow control, character echoing, and other functions for a connection to an X.25  
host.  
z
X.28—Specifies the user interface for locally controlling a PAD.  
Note: The communication server is not a PAD.  
z
X.29—Specifies a protocol for setting the X.3 parameters via a network  
connection.  
XXX PAD calls can be made from AI296 with a PAD shell command or by defining an  
alias that routes a call to the destination XXX PAD call. An XXX PAD destination is  
defined like an X.25 SVC destination with the addition of XXX as the called protocol.  
When XXX is used as a call protocol, it can take arguments to set the X.3 parameters,  
similar to the setcommand used within the padshell command.  
8-31  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
PKT  
The packetizing module holds data as it arrives until AI296 receives specified  
characters (such as new lines). Once the packetizing character is received, all of the  
data that has been held is passed on as a single packet. This module also allows data  
to be packetized on a timer, which you can set. It also allows you to specify which  
characters, if any, to be filtered out of the data stream. PKT works on all protocols.  
Defaults  
Sets no packetizing timer  
Sets no idle packetizing timer  
Sets no filter characters  
Passes the break upstream  
Passes the break downstream  
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream  
Optional Parameters  
-Td  
Sets the packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes d  
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d  
to zero, the option is turned off.  
-Id  
Sets the idle packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes  
after dhundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.  
-Pd,d,d  
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters.  
-Fd,d,d  
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered  
character.  
-U  
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.  
-D  
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.  
-S  
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16  
characters. The packet module accepts only one -Sparameter.  
-E  
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session. It behaves like  
an X.25 when X.3 parameter 3 is set to 1.  
Examples  
PKT -T6  
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06  
seconds.  
8-32  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
PKT -P0xD,0x3B  
PKT -F10,127  
PKT -U  
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing characters to  
carriage return and semi-colon.  
Provides packetizing and filters out the characters for line  
feed and delete.  
Provides packetizing but prevents breaks from being  
propagated upstream.  
PKT -I10 -P0x0D -D  
PKT -S13,10  
RBP  
Provides packetizing on carriage returns for .10 seconds of  
idle time and prevents breaks from being propagated  
downstream.  
Provides packetizing and sets the sequence to carriage  
return followed by a line feed.  
Record boundary preservation is a Cisco protocol that works with messages traveling  
between X.25 and TCP/IP protocols. RBP allows for packet preservation of X.25 data  
when transport is over a TCP/IP network.  
RBP is equivalent in functionality to AEP in that X.25 packet boundaries are  
maintained with the addition of a configurable record boundary.  
Optional Parameter  
RBP -Md  
Defines the maximum record size in bytes. RBP will split an incoming  
X.25 data packet across multiple records so that no single record  
exceeds this value. X.25 packets with this parameter set will be  
combined as long as the resulting record does not exceed this value. If  
this value is not set, each X.25 data packet will be converted into exactly  
one record. Valid range for this parameter is 256 to 1500. The default is  
no M-bit.  
TL1  
The Translation Language One module typically works with messages traveling  
between X.25 and asynchronous protocols. However, it also works with all other  
protocols. Some OSSs require that each TL1 command/response be fully contained  
in one X.25 packet. By packetizing on the TL1 termination characters (“;<>”), the TL1  
module ensures that each TL1 command/response is transmitted in one X.25 packet.  
8-33  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Defaults  
Sets no packetizing timer  
Sets no idle packetizing timer  
Sets no filter characters  
Passes the break upstream  
Passes the break downstream  
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream  
Optional Parameters  
-Td  
Sets the packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes d  
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d  
to zero, this option is turned off.  
-Id  
Sets the idle packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes  
after dhundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.  
-Pd,d,d  
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters.  
-Fd,d,d  
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered  
character.  
-U  
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.  
-D  
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.  
-S  
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16  
characters. The packet module accepts only one -Sparameter.  
-E  
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session. It behaves like  
an X.25 when X.3 parameter 3 is set to 1.  
8-34  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Examples  
TL1 -T6  
Provides TL1 packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06  
seconds.  
TL1 -F10,127  
TL1 -U  
Provides TL1 packetizing and filters out the characters for line  
feed and delete.  
Provides TL1 packetizing and prevents breaks from passing  
upstream.  
TL1 -120 -D  
Provides TL1 packetizing on TL1 delimiters for 20 seconds of idle  
time. Prevents breaks from passing downstream.  
TN  
The Telnet module filters Telnet commands out of the data stream and processes  
them appropriately. It also adds commands, as necessary, to data as it travels  
downstream. When a Telnet break is received, it is converted to an X.25 or  
asynchronous break as required. When an X.25 or asynchronous break is received  
from upstream, it is converted to a Telnet break and passed downstream.  
Defaults  
Passes breaks upstream  
Passes breaks downstream  
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL SGA  
Optional Parameters  
-U  
Prevents passing break upstream.  
-D  
Prevents passing break downstream.  
-Ed,d  
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL Suppress Go Ahead  
(SGA). This is useful when a Telnet connection is made to a remote device  
that provides an echo. If d,dis specified, then the Telnet negotiation string  
is modified. The Telnet negotiation string can be up to 32 characters.  
8-35  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Examples  
TN -U  
Provides Telnet handling, but prevents breaks from being  
propagated upstream.  
TN -E  
Provides Telnet handling and initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL  
Echo and WILL SGA.  
TN -E255,1  
Provides Telnet handling and causes the Telnet session to send IAC  
(255) ECHO (1) when the connection is initiated. Initiates WILL SGA.  
Module Properties  
Some modules are only used for one specific purpose. For example, the PKT module  
buffers all received data until a specified character is received in that data. The TN  
module looks for Telnet commands embedded in the data.  
AEP, AEPN, PAD, PKT, and TN can be combined to allow break propagation  
between the following protocols:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
X.25 (with X.29 break) to asynchronous break  
X.25 (with X.29 break) to Telnet break  
Asynchronous break to X.25 (with X.29 break)  
Asynchronous break to Telnet break  
Telnet break to X.25 (with X.29 break)  
Telnet break to asynchronous break  
X.29 break propagation across TCP connections between two AI296 cards  
Asynchronous break propagation across TCP connections between two AI296  
cards  
z
Response to an indication of X.29 break.  
Note: For more information on this, refer to Source/Destination Protocol Tables on  
Module Arguments  
Some modules use protocol arguments to place restrictions on functionality. For  
example, the PKT module uses arguments to specify the characters to filter out of  
data and the characters to packetize in data.  
8-36  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Use the following guidelines when entering arguments:  
z
Enter values separated by a comma in octal (base 8), hexadecimal (base 16), or  
decimal (base 10) format. Octal numbers have a leading zero and hexadecimal  
numbers have a leading 0x. Refer to the Table 8-17 for more information.  
z
z
z
Type characters as their ASCII value.  
Do not use decimal points, tabs, or spaces when entering arguments.  
Enter at least one value when a doption is included with an argument. d  
represents the ASCII value for a character. Valid values are from 0 to 255.  
Table 8-17 displays descriptions for protocol argument entries.  
Table 8-17 Protocol Argument Entries  
Entry Description  
0x0d  
59  
Specifies a carriage return in hexadecimal format.  
Specifies a semi-colon in decimal format.  
Specifies letter “a” in octal format.  
0141  
55  
Specifies number “7” in ASCII decimal format.  
8-37  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Alias Macros  
An alias macro is a program within an alias that translates incoming call requests into  
outgoing call requests. It is a shortcut that allows a programmer to write many aliases  
by only writing one macro.  
Macros allow routing calls with fewer aliases. Using them with alternate routing  
provides multiple routes for a single alias.  
A macro may be entered for combinations of any or all of the following items: Alias  
names, called addresses, caller’s addresses, call data, application-specific strings,  
alternate routing aliases.  
The following topics are covered in this section:  
z
z
Alias Macro Components  
This section discusses the components in an alias macro, including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Start Symbols  
The start symbol for an alias macro is an equal (=) sign. It is followed by one or more  
alias macro components.  
Comments  
Comments are added at the programmer’s discretion to explain macro functionality.  
Comments can be entered either on a blank line or at the end of a line containing a  
macro. To enter a comment on a blank line, it must begin with two forward slashes (//).  
To enter a comment in a field with a macro, it must begin with a pound sign (#) at the  
end of a macro.  
8-38  
       
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
This example displays a comment on its own line in the Application String field and a  
comment after a macro in the Alternate Route field.  
Application String . ........................................... //links 1-4  
Alternate Route . . ................................. ="6145550384"#from OH  
Note: The pound sign (#) can be entered as part of the macro string if it is enclosed  
in either single or double quotes. The pound sign may be either directly  
enclosed (=A+’#’+D(C)), or the string that the pound sign resides in may be  
enclosed (=‘198.127.1.4#23’).  
Constants  
Macro constants are either fixed alphanumeric characters enclosed in single or  
double quotes or integers between positive and negative 2,147, 483, 647. All strings  
equal zero. Strings cannot be used in mathematical functions.  
Variables  
Several variables are recognized by macros. Refer to Table 8-18 for more  
information.  
Note: Variables are not case-sensitive.  
Table 8-18 Macro Variables  
Variable  
Value  
C (CUD)  
Specifies a “call user data” variable.  
A (CALLED) Specifies a “called address” variable.  
B (CALLER) Specifies a “caller’s address” variable.  
Wildcard Symbols  
Macros have two available wildcard symbols:  
z ? matches any single character.  
z * matches zero or more characters.  
Note: Alias names that use wildcards are not really macros. Wildcards are not  
processed in alias names that start with ‘=’.  
8-39  
       
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Operators  
Operators are used for calculation of mathematical expressions in alias macros.  
AI296 evaluates expressions from left to right in order of precedence as shown in  
Table 8-19. To change the order of precedence, a programmer may enclose a portion  
of an expression in parentheses ( ) to calculate that portion first.  
4+3*2  
Specifies an equation that equals 10.  
(4+3)*2 Specifies an equation that equals 14.  
AI296 evaluates both regular and boolean logic operators. Refer to Table 8-19 for a  
list of all available operators in order of precedence.  
Table 8-19 Operators in Order of Precedence  
Operator Description  
#
Specifies a comment at the ends the alias macro expression.  
*
/
Specifies a multiplication operation.  
Specifies a division operation.  
%
Specifies the remainder of a division operation.  
+
-
Specifies an addition operation.  
Specifies a subtraction operation.  
Expressions that use the following operators return “0” for a false condition and “-1”  
for true condition:  
<<  
<<=  
=
Specifies a less than evaluation.  
Specifies a less than or equal to evaluation.  
Specifies an equal to evaluation.  
>
>=  
<<>  
Specifies a greater than evaluation.  
Specifies a greater than or equal to evaluation.  
Specifies a not equal to evaluation.  
&
Specifies a boolean logical AND evaluation. This requires that two  
conditions are true before continuing with the evaluation.  
^
Specifies a boolean logical exclusive OR evaluation. This requires that  
one condition or another (not both) is true before continuing with the  
evaluation.  
|
Specifies a boolean logical OR evaluation. This requires that one  
condition or both conditions are true before continuing with the  
evaluation.  
8-40  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Table 8-19 Operators in Order of Precedence (Continued)  
Operator Description  
!
Specifies a boolean logical NOT evaluation. This changes a true  
condition to a false condition (and vice versa) before continuing with  
the evaluation.  
Functions  
Functions are preset command keywords that perform string and value conversions.  
Some functions can be entered with only a single character. For example, sand  
switchrepresent the same function.  
Note: Functions are not case-sensitive.  
Table 8-20 lists available functions and their descriptions in alphabetical order.  
Table 8-20 Alias Macro Functions  
Alias Macro Function  
Description of Operation  
asc(string)  
Returns the ASCII integer value of the first  
character in a string.  
chr$(n)  
Returns the character that corresponds to ASCII  
integer value n.  
hex$(n)  
or  
h(n)  
Returns the hexadecimal equivalent to decimal  
value n. For example, =hex$(31)returns hex value  
1F.  
if(expression,a,b)  
or  
Returns aif expressionis not zero or bif  
expressionis zero.  
i(expression,a,b)  
left$(string,n)  
or  
Returns the left-most ncharacters of string. If nis  
greater than the length of string, the function  
returns the entire string.  
l(string,n)  
len(string)  
or  
n(string)  
Returns the length of string.  
mid$(string,x,n)  
or  
Returns ncharacters from stringstarting with the  
xth character. If xis greater than the length of  
string, the function returns a null string. If fewer  
than ncharacters follow character x, the function  
returns to end of the string.  
m(string,x,n)  
8-41  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Table 8-20 Alias Macro Functions (Continued)  
Alias Macro Function  
Description of Operation  
mid$(string,x)  
or  
Returns characters from stringstarting with the  
xth character and continuing to the right-most end  
character. If xis greater than the length of string,  
the function returns a null string.  
m(string,x)  
myip(n)  
Returns a string representation of the nth IP  
address assigned to AI296. nmust be greater than  
0.  
pos(string,char,n)  
or  
Returns the position of the nth occurrence of char  
in string. If there are less than noccurrences of  
char in string, the function returns the length of  
string.  
p(string,char,n)  
right$(string,n)  
or  
Returns the right-most ncharacters of string.  
Returns the entire string if nis greater than the  
length of the string.  
r(string,n)  
str$(n)  
or  
d(n)  
Returns nconverted into a decimal string.  
switch(target_exp,  
If target_expmatches exp1, the function returns  
default,exp1,result1,exp2 result1. If target_expmatches exp2, the function  
,result2...)  
returns result2. This continues through all pairs of  
expressions and results. If target_expdoes not  
match any of the expressions, then defaultis  
returned.  
or  
s(target_exp,default,exp1  
,result1,exp2,result2...)  
val(string)  
or  
v(string)  
Converts a string to its decimal integer value. For  
example, =v(”032”)returns integer 32.  
?(n)  
Returns the nth wildcard string from the alias  
match.  
8-42  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Alias Macro Configuration  
Often there are several ways to write a macro and get the same result. One  
programmer will likely design macros differently than another.  
Note: From the Alias Menu, you can input a string with * in it and the search will  
break apart the string using * as a delimiter. The search checks the alias list  
for an alias name that contains the components. It does not limit the search to  
the beginning and end of text of the alias as in AI198.  
Configuration Examples  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
Alias name 172.16.32.237#30* matches source address 172.16.32.237 with a  
port number of 30 followed by zero or more characters  
z
z
The caller’s address is PVC  
Call data ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates strings from ASY.1 to ASY.6.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ..................................... 172.16.32.237#30*  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . ................................................... PVC  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
Alias name 43042* matches source addresses that start with 43042 and may  
end with zero or more characters  
z
Called Address ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates a called address string of  
ASY.1 through ASY.6.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ................................................ 43042*  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)  
Call Data . . . . . ................................................. TOSUN  
8-43  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
z
z
Alias name =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1) matches the base IP address of AI296  
with any port number.  
Called address =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1)) redirects the call to  
10.9.8.7 with the same port number.  
Called protocol TN specifies that the Telnet protocol is used for the connection  
to the called address.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............. =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1)  
Destination . . . . .......................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................  
Called Address . . . ... =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1))  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................  
Caller's Protocol ..........................................  
Called Protocol . ....................................... TN  
8-44  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
Alias Configuration Examples  
Examples are given for the following connections:  
z
z
z
z
SVC to SVC Connection  
In Figure 8-2, the X.25 data on the incoming AI296 is on baseport 16, link 2and has a  
called address of 6145551234. The call continues on the outgoing AI296 on baseport 32,  
link 4 and called address 6145553897:  
Called Address  
6145551234  
IP Address  
172.16.1.111  
Called Protocol  
TL1  
X.25 Network  
TCP/IP Network  
X.25 Network  
AI296 Incoming  
AI296 Outgoing  
Baseport 16  
Link 2  
Baseport 32  
Link 4  
Called Address  
6145553897  
Figure 8-2 SVC to SVC Connection Diagram  
8-45  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
This example displays the menu items used to configure the SVC to SVC connection:  
>10 TL1  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -------------------------------------------------------6145551234  
02+SLC Routing  
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.1.111  
04 Called address ---------------------------------------------X25.4.6145553897  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------TL1  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
16+Test macros  
17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
8-46  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
SVC to PVC Connection  
In Figure 8-3, the X.25 data on the incoming AI296 is on baseport 16, link 2 with a  
called address of 6145551234. The call continues on the outgoing AI296 on baseport 32,  
link 1:  
Called Address  
6145551234  
Called Protocol  
IP Address  
172.16.1.111  
TL1  
X.25 Network  
TCP/IP Network  
X.25 Network  
AI296 Incoming  
AI296 Outgoing  
Baseport 32  
Link 1  
Baseport 16  
Link 2  
LCN 4  
LCN 3  
Figure 8-3 SVC to PVC Connection Diagram  
8-47  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
This example displays the menu items used to configure an SVC to PVC connection:  
>10 TL1  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -------------------------------------------------------6145551234  
02+SLC Routing  
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.1.111  
04 Called address ----------------------------------------------------------PVC  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -----------------------------------------------------------X25.1.4  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------TL1  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
16+Test macros  
17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
Note: Refer to Alias Configuration Examples on page 8-45 for a descriptions of all  
menu items in this example.  
8-48  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
PVC to SVC Connection  
In Figure 8-4, the incoming X.25 data on the incoming AI296 is on baseport 16, link 2  
with the alias of 16.X25.2.3. The call then continues out the outgoing AI296 on baseport  
32 and called address 6145553897:  
Alias 16.X25.2.3  
Called Protocol  
TL1  
IP Address 172.16.1.111  
X.25 Network  
TCP/IP Network  
X.25 Network  
AI296 Incoming  
AI296 Outgoing  
Baseport 16  
Link 2  
Baseport 32  
Link 4  
Called Address 6145553897  
Figure 8-4 PVC to SVC Connection Diagram  
8-49  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
This example displays the menu items used to configure a PVC to SVC connection.  
>10 TL1  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -------------------------------------------------------16.X25.2.3  
02+SLC Routing  
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.1.111  
04 Called address ---------------------------------------------X25.4.6145553897  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------TL1  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
16+Test macros  
17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
Note: Refer to Alias Configuration Examples on page 8-45 for a descriptions of all  
menu items in this example.  
8-50  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
MLT Route  
You can use aliases to route MLT call information through a TCP/IP network. The  
example in Figure 8-5 shows how aliases can be set up to route an MLT call. One  
alias is configured for an AI296 card that is connected to the host and the other is  
configured for an AI296 card that is connected to an NE.  
Alias Name:  
Called Address  
Example: MLT:3  
Called Address: Destination IP Address  
Example: 192.168.1.140#1001  
Called Protocol: AEPN -L  
Link 3  
Link 6  
TCP/IP Network  
NE  
MLT Host  
AI296  
AI296  
Alias Name:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 192.168.1.140#1001  
Caller’s Address:MLT:link_number  
Example: MLT:6  
Caller’s Protocol:AEPN -L  
Figure 8-5 MLT Call Routing Example  
8-51  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
This example displays the menu items used to configure the MLT host alias shown in  
10,AEPN -L  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name ------------------------------------------------------------MLT:3  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -------------------------------------------192.168.1.140#1001  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -----------------------------------------------------AEPN -L  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
This example displays the menu items used to configure the MLT network element  
alias shown in Figure 8-5 on page 8-51.  
>11 AEPN -L  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -----------------------------------------------192.168.1.140#1001  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address ------------------------------------------------------MLT:6  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol ---------------------------------------------------AEPN -L  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
8-52  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
Link-to-Link Call Routing  
Link-to-link call routing lets users route all SVC calls coming in on one X.25 link to  
another X.25 link. By using X.25 link-to-link call routing, it is now possible to create a  
default route for all calls from a specified X.25 link. The alias for the default link-to-link  
route can route all calls destined for the same link. On previous versions of AI296,  
users had to create an alias for each unique called address.  
In Figure 8-6, NE1 and NE2 place calls to NE3, NE4, and other elements on the X.25  
network. Aliases route calls from NE1 and NE2 to the network elements. A link-to-link  
call route exists between links 1 and 2, and between links 3 and 4. An incoming X.25  
SVC call from NE1 that does not match an alias in the table would be routed to link 2,  
and an incoming X.25 SVC call from NE2 that does not match an alias in the table  
would be routed to to link 4.  
Important: The link-to-link call alias must be at the end of the alias list. If the  
link-to-link alias is above an actual destination alias, an X.25 SVC call  
will be processed by the default link-to-link alias.  
Link 1  
Link 2  
NE 1  
Link-to-Link Calls  
X.25 Packet  
Network  
Link 4  
Link 3  
AI296  
NE 2  
IP Network  
NE 3  
NE 4  
AI296  
Figure 8-6 Link-to-Link Routing Example  
8-53  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Configuration Examples  
This example displays AI296 configured to listen for all SVC calls on links 1 and 3 and  
route those calls to links 2 and 4 (as displayed in Figure 8-6 on page 8-53).  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. X25.1.SVC  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . ............................................... X25LL.2  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. X25.3.SVC  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . ............................................... X25LL.4  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
Beginning  
No  
[End]  
+ Alias Test Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
8-54  
AI296 9  
AI296 Commands  
This chapter provides information about each AI296 shell command and all AI198 winslc  
commands that are supported by AI296. These commands perform AI296 system tasks.  
Guide to this Chapter  
9-1  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: Commands Overview  
Commands Overview  
AI296 is configurable directly through the local system using shell commands or  
through AI198 using winslc commands and the menu system.  
Shell Commands  
Shell commands offer some of the same functionality available in the AI296 local  
menu system, including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Creating, modifying, or deleting users and passwords  
Accessing the AI296 menu  
Configuring PVCs  
Monitoring performance and diagnostic information  
Pinging an IP address  
Setting up an ARP table  
Setting the trace level.  
Shell Connections  
Before using the shell commands, a shell connection to AI296 must be established.  
You can connect locally using an asynchronous port on the AI296 front panel or  
remotely using a Telnet connection.  
Establishing a Local Shell Connection  
Establish a local shell connection to AI296 through any port configured as a login port.  
(By default, all ports are configured as login ports, but only port 1 is enabled.)  
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to  
connect to AI296. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation  
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.  
2. Set up your terminal emulation software to connect using COM port 1 (COM1).  
3. Configure COM port 1 with the following parameters:  
z
z
z
z
z
Bits per second: 9600  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: None  
4. From within your terminal emulation software, press ENTER to request a login  
prompt.  
9-2  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: Commands Overview  
5. At the login prompt, enter your user name.  
6. At the password prompt, enter your password.  
Notes: aiis the default user name and password. AI296 allows only five logins  
using the default password. On the sixth login, AI296 will prompt you to  
change the default password to a new password.  
Keep a copy of your username and password in a safe place. If you lose  
or forget your password on AI296 in standalone mode, you must call  
Kentrox customer service for assistance in gaining access to the card.  
The destination menu appears.  
7. Enter ai.  
Establishing a Remote Shell Connection  
Establish a remote shell connection to AI296 using AI198 command telnetor using  
another Telnet client. To establish a Telnet session:  
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to  
connect to AI296. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation  
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.  
2. For user name, enter ai.  
3. For password, enter ai. The destination menu appears.  
4. For destination, enter ai. The [296] prompt appears.  
9-3  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: winslc Commands  
winslc Commands  
The winslc commands let the user communicate with AI296 from AI198. Use these  
commands to enter data, diagnose problems, and retrieve information from AI296.  
Displaying winslc Command Logging  
To monitor winslc commands, press CTRL+l when logged into AI198 to turn on  
logging.  
Using winslc Commands  
To use winslc commands, the user must be logged into AI198 to receive output from  
AI296. AI198 relays the command to AI296, which processes the command and  
sends the result to the system log port (as configured in AI198 Menu 1.1). Valid winslc  
commands are:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
From the AI198, you can view the available winslc commands by entering the  
following command:  
winslc baseport help  
where baseportspecifies the baseport number of AI296.  
Log/Alarm Message Header  
To obtain output from winslc commands, enable the activity/alarm log (AI198 Menu  
1.1, menu item 01*The activity and alarm log is turned). The first line of the response  
for most winslc commands shows the following standard log/alarm message header:  
>@AI19807:42:26 081104 Sev=F Base=016 Msg:  
9-4  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: winslc Commands  
Table 9-1 describes the Log/Alarm message header elements.  
Table 9-1 Log/Alarm Message Header Elements  
Header Element Description  
@AI198  
Specifies the node name for the device that is producing the  
log/alarm message (in this case, AI198).  
7:42:26  
081104  
Sev=F  
Specifies the current time.  
Specifies the current date.  
Specifies the message severity level.  
Specifies the line card baseport number.  
Introduces the log/alarm message.  
Base=016  
Msg  
9-5  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
aaa  
Description  
These commands configure TACACS+ accounting, authentication, and authorization  
settings.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa  
account { disable | enable }  
authen { disable | enable } [ all | async | telnet | ftp ]  
author { priv-lvl | command }  
chpass  
fallback { disable | enable }  
ppp authen { link_range | * } { disable | enable | fallback }  
profile { priv_range } { profile_name | default }  
retry { retry_count | default }  
stat [ clear ]  
summary  
timeout { timeout_value | default }  
Parameters  
account  
Enables or disables TACACS+ accounting of user login events and  
shell command events. An accounting start packet or stop packet is  
issued each time a user logs into or out of AI296. An accounting start  
packet is also issued for each shell command that is run.  
Note: If enabled, accounting is performed for all shell connection  
types (Async, Telnet, and FTP), even if authentication is  
disabled. For information about authentication, refer to  
command aaa authen.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z disable—Disables TACACS+ accounting.  
z enable—Enables TACACS+ accounting.  
9-6  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
authen  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication for AI296 command shell  
access. TACACS+ authentication may be enabled on all connections,  
or on a connection type basis. By default, TACACS+ authentication is  
disabled on all connection types. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z all—Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on all  
connection types.  
Note: If no connection type is specified, all is automatically  
selected.  
z async—Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on  
asynchronous link connections.  
z disable—Disables TACACS+ authentication.  
z enable—Enables TACACS+ authentication.  
z ftp—Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on FTP  
connections.  
z telnet—Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on Telnet  
connections.  
author  
Configures the TACACS+ authorization method for the AI296 shell.  
The authorization method can be either privilege level or  
per-command. Privilege level authorization is based on the priv-lvl  
returned from the TACACS+ server. Per-command authorization  
requires AI296 to contact the TACACS+ server for each shell command  
run by a user. Individual commands are then allowed or denied.  
Note: Authorization is performed only on the connection types that  
have enabled authentication. For information about enabling  
authentication, refer to command aaa authen.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z command—Configures the TACACS+ authorization method that  
requires to contact the TACACS+ server for each shell command  
run by a user. Individual commands are then allowed or denied.  
z priv-lvl—Configures the TACACS+ authorization method based  
on the priv-lvl returned from the TACACS+ server.  
chpass  
Changes the current user’s password on the TACACS+ server.  
Note: The TACACS+ server may not support, or be configured to  
support, password changes.  
9-7  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
fallback  
Enables or disables TACACS+ fallback for shell access. If TACACS+  
fallback is enabled and attempts to contact all configured TACACS+  
servers fail, then AI296’s user database is used for authentication and  
authorization. The AI296 local log file is used for accounting. The  
following parameters are accepted:  
z disable—Disables TACACS+ fallback.  
z enable—Enables TACACS+ fallback.  
ppp  
authen  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication and sets the fallback  
mode for specified AsyncPPP links.  
Note: The link type must be set to AsyncPPP for this command to  
have any effect.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all links.  
z disable—Disables TACACS+ authentication.  
z enable—Enables TACACS+ authentication.  
z fallback—Enables TACACS+ authentication with fallback.  
z link_range—Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to  
16. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-).  
For example, 1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
9-8  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
profile  
Associates a custom profile with a privilege level or range of privilege  
levels. The following rules apply:  
z
TACACS+ privilege levels range from 0 to 15.  
z
Custom profiles can be associated with privilege levels 2 through  
14.  
z
z
Privilege levels 2 through 14 default to the management system  
profile.  
Privilege levels 0, 1, and 15 are reserved for the Status,  
Management, and Supervisor system profiles (respectively).  
Note: For information on creating custom profiles, refer to command  
Privilege levels are used only if the authorization method is set to  
priv-lvl. The only exception to this occurs under all of the following  
conditions:  
1. The authentication server returns a privilege level.  
2. The authorization server cannot be reached.  
3. The authorization is set to per-command and fallback is enabled.  
Note: For information on configuring the authorization method, refer  
to command aaa author.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z default—Removes the association between a range of privilege  
levels and a profile.  
z priv_range—Defines the range of privilege levels that will be  
associated with the profile. Individual values are separated by  
commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies privilege  
levels 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
z profile_name—Specifies the name of an existing profile.  
retry  
Configures the number of consecutive connection attempts that are  
made to a TACACS+ server before the attempt fails. Consecutive  
attempts are only made if the TACACS+ server responds but refuses a  
connection. If no response is received from a TACACS+ server before  
the configured timeout period, then no further connection attempts are  
made. For information on configuring the timeout period, refer to  
command aaa on page 9-6.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z retry_count—Defines the number of consecutive connection  
attempts that are made. Valid values are 1 to 100.  
z default—Resets the number of connection attempts to the default  
value.  
9-9  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
stat  
Displays or clears AAA specific counters and statistics. The following  
parameter is accepted:  
clear—Clears all counters and statistics.  
summary  
timeout  
Displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and accounting  
settings.  
Configures the number of seconds to wait for a response from a  
TACACS+ server. If no response is received from the server in the  
allowed number of seconds, the connection attempt fails. The following  
parameters are accepted:  
z timeout_value—Defines how long (in seconds) AI296 will wait for  
a response from a TACACS+ server when a connection attempt is  
made. Valid values are 1 to 120.  
z default—Resets the timeout value to its default.  
Command Defaults  
Disabled TACACS+ accounting, authenitcation, and authorization  
Examples  
The following AAA settings are configured:  
z
z
z
Enabled TACACS+ fallback  
Enabled AAA accounting  
Enabled AAA authentication on telnet connections  
z priv-lvl authorization  
z
z
Custom profile newProf with TACACS+ privilege levels 3 to 5  
Enabled TACACS+ authentication for AsyncPPP links 1 to 9  
z 10 retry attempts  
z 15 second timeout.  
[296] aaa fallback enable  
[296] aaa account enable  
[296] aaa authen enable telnet  
WARNING: Potential lock-out:  
At least one TACACS+ server must be enabled for Authentication  
AND at least one TACACS+ server must be enabled for Authorization.  
[296] aaa author priv-lvl  
[296] aaa profile 3-5 newProf  
[296] aaa ppp authen 1-9 enable  
[296] aaa retry 10  
[296] aaa timeout 15  
[296]  
9-10  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: aaa  
This example displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and accounting  
settings.  
[296] aaa summary  
Async Shell Access:  
Telnet Shell Access:  
FTP Access:  
Local  
AAA  
Local  
Authorization:  
Accounting:  
Fallback:  
Priv-lvl  
Enabled  
Enabled  
15 seconds  
10  
AAA Timeout:  
AAA Retry Count:  
Priv-lvl 3: newProf  
Priv-lvl 4: newProf  
Priv-lvl 5: newProf  
[296]  
This example displays all AAA specific counters and statistics.  
[296] aaa stats  
AAA Statistics  
--------------  
Authentication Attempts: 0  
Authentication Failures: 0  
Authentication Fallbacks: 0  
Authorization Attempts: 0  
Authorization Failures: 0  
Authorization Fallbacks: 0  
Accounting Attempts: 16  
Accounting Failures: 0  
Accounting Fallbacks: 16  
[296]  
This example displays a successful password change on a TACACS+ server.  
[296] aaa chpass  
Old Password:  
New Password:  
Re-enter New password:  
Password Changed  
Password Change was successful  
[296]  
9-11  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: alarm  
alarm  
Description  
This command:  
z
z
Displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity  
Displays alarms for a specified alarm group or for a specified range of severity  
levels within an alarm group  
z
z
z
z
z
Displays alarms by severity level or for a specified range of severity levels  
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups and the overall alarm severity  
Clears a specified non-self-clearing alarm group  
Masks a specified alarm group  
Unmasks a specified alarm group.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
alarm  
group [ range ]  
-sev [ range ]  
-clear [ group ]  
-mask group  
-unmask group  
Parameters  
group  
Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or unmask. Valid  
values are existing alarm groups. The following parameters is accepted:  
range—Defines a range of alarm severity levels to display. Valid  
values are 1 to 32. Individual values in the range are separated by  
hyphens (-).  
-sev  
Displays all alarms or a range of alarms based severity level. The  
following parameters is accepted:  
range—Defines a range of alarm severity levels to display. Valid  
values are 1 to 32. Individual values in the range are separated by  
hyphens (-).  
9-12  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: alarm  
-clear  
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups or a specified non-self-clearing  
alarm group.  
Note: Only non-self-clearing alarm groups can be manually cleared.  
Self-clearing alarms clear themselves when the problem that  
caused the alarm is resolved.  
The following parameter is accepted:  
group—Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or  
unmask. Valid values are existing alarm groups.  
-mask  
Prevents a specified alarm group from affecting overall alarm severity.  
The following parameter is accepted:  
group—Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or  
unmask. Valid values are existing alarm groups.  
-unmask  
Allows a specified alarm group to affect overall alarm severity. The  
following parameter is accepted:  
group—Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or  
unmask. Valid values are existing alarm groups.  
Examples  
This example displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity.  
[296]alarm  
Alarm Group Sev Date & Time Message (most recent, most severe in group)  
----------- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
*general  
links  
0 00-00 00:00  
0 06-01 00:00 Link 1 up.  
----------- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
*not self-clearing () masked  
Overall alarm severity: 0  
[296]  
9-13  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: alarm  
This example displays all system alarms in group links.  
[296]alarm links  
Num Sev Date & Time Message  
--- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
1 0 06-01 00:00 Link 1 up.  
2 0 06-01 00:00 Link 2 down.  
3 0 06-01 00:00 Link 3 down.  
4 0 06-01 00:00 Link 4 down.  
5 0 06-01 00:00 Link 5 down.  
6 0 06-01 00:00 Link 6 down.  
7 0 06-01 00:00 Link 7 down.  
8 0 06-01 00:00 Link 8 down.  
9 0 06-01 00:00 Link 9 down.  
10 0 06-01 00:00 Link 10 down.  
11 0 06-01 00:00 Link 11 down.  
12 0 06-01 00:00 Link 12 down.  
13 0 06-01 00:00 Link 13 down.  
14 0 06-01 00:00 Link 14 down.  
15 0 06-01 00:00 Link 15 down.  
16 0 06-01 00:00 Link 16 down.  
--- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
'links' alarm group severity: 0  
[296]  
This example displays alarms for links 5-8 in group links.  
[296]alarm links 5-8  
Num Sev Date & Time Message  
--- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
5 0 06-01 00:00 Link 5 down.  
6 0 06-01 00:00 Link 6 down.  
7 0 06-01 00:00 Link 7 down.  
8 0 06-01 00:00 Link 8 down.  
--- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
'links' alarm group severity: 0  
[296]  
This example displays all alarms by severity level.  
[296]alarm -sev  
Alarm Group Num Sev Date & Time Message  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
links  
links  
links  
links  
general  
1 4 06-13 14:40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.  
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.  
10 4 06-13 14:40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.  
12 4 06-13 14:40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.  
1 6 06-13 14:40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
( ) masked  
[296]  
9-14  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: alarm  
This example displays all alarms that have a severity level between 4 and 7.  
[296]alarm -sev 4-7  
Alarm Group Num Sev Date & Time Message  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
links  
links  
links  
links  
general  
1 4 06-13 14:40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.  
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.  
10 4 06-13 14:40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.  
12 4 06-13 14:40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.  
1 6 06-13 14:40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
( ) masked  
[296]  
This example displays the clearing of all non-self-clearing alarm groups.  
[296]alarm -clear  
Alarm groups cleared.  
Overall alarm severity set to 0.  
[296]  
This example displays the clearing of non-self-clearing alarm group general.  
[296]alarm -clear general  
Alarm group cleared.  
[296]  
This example displays the prevention of alarm group links from affecting the overall  
alarm severity.  
[296]alarm -mask links  
Alarm group masked.  
[296]  
This example displays the unmasking of alarm group links.  
[296]alarm -unmask links  
Alarm group unmasked.  
[296]  
9-15  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: arp  
arp  
Description  
This command displays, deletes, or adds entries in the ARP cache.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell:  
arp  
-a [ ip_address ]  
-d ip_address  
-s ip_address mac_address  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport arp  
-a [ ip_address ]  
-d ip_address  
-s ip_address mac_address  
Parameters  
-a  
Displays all entries in the ARP cache table or just the ip_addressentry.  
The following parameter is accepted:  
ip_address—Defines the IP address of the destination device in  
dotted decimal format.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
-d  
Deletes an entry from the ARP cache table. The following parameter is  
accepted:  
ip_address—Defines the IP address of the destination device in  
dotted decimal format.  
-s  
Adds a permanent entry to the ARP cache for the current session.  
Permanent entries must be in the same subnetwork as the IP address  
of the destination device. The following parameters are accepted:  
z ip_address—Defines the IP address of the destination device in  
dotted decimal format.  
z mac_address—Defines the MAC address of the destination device.  
9-16  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: arp  
Examples  
This example displays all ARP cache entries.  
[296] arp -a  
Internet Address  
172.16.52.16  
172.16.2.9  
[296]  
Ethernet Address  
00-00-92-90-F2-D9  
00-40-72-00-7F-96  
Type  
temp  
temp  
Life  
5 mins  
2 mins  
Column  
Description  
Internet Address  
Ethernet Address  
Type  
Displays the IP address of the destination device.  
Displays the MAC address of the destination device.  
Displays the type of ARP cache entry as perm or temp. Type temp  
specifies that the entry is temporary and will be deleted when the  
time interval specified in the Life column expires. Type perm  
specifies that the entry was entered by the user with the -s  
option. This entry will not expire and can be removed using the  
-ddelete option.  
Note: Resetting AI296 clears both permanent and temporary  
entries.  
Life  
Displays the time interval for which the temporary entry will  
remain in the ARP cache.  
This example displays an ARP cache entry with IP address 10.40.5.20.  
[296]arp -a 10.40.5.20  
Internet Address  
10.40.5.20  
[296]  
Ethernet Address  
00-01-02-EE-A8-30  
Type  
temp  
Life  
4 mins  
This example displays the configuration of an ARP cache entry with IP address  
10.40.53.2 and MAC address 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a.  
[296]arp -s 10.40.53.2 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a  
10.40.53.2 mapped to Ethernet address 08-00-09-4A-C5-5A  
[296]  
9-17  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: arp  
This example displays the deletion of an ARP cache entry with IP address 10.40.53.2.  
[296]arp -d 10.40.53.2  
Mapping for 10.40.53.2 deleted  
[296]  
9-18  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: break  
break  
Description  
This command terminates an asynchronous or shell connection. Use command diag-  
tconn on page 9-49 (not command who on page 9-122) when referencing  
connections and connection ID numbers.  
Note: This command only works for calls connected to the shell.  
CAUTION: This command operates without regard to current activity on the serial  
port.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
break { link_number | connection_origin }  
break -id id_number  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport break { link_number | connection_origin }  
winslc baseport break -id id_number  
Parameters  
connection_origin  
Defines the IP address and port number of the device  
connection being terminated.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
id_number  
Defines the ID number of the device connection being  
terminated.  
link_number  
Defines the link number for the connection being terminated.  
9-19  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: break  
Examples  
This example displays the termination of a shell connection for a device with IP  
address 10.40.5.11 and port number 1821.  
[296]break 10.40.5.11#1821  
Breaking connection: 10.40.5.11#1821  
[296]  
This example displays the termination of a connection for a device with ID 65.  
[296]break -id 65  
Breaking connection with ID: 65  
[296]  
9-20  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: bridge  
bridge  
Description  
This command dumps a list of all the addresses in the bridge table or clears the  
bridge table.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
bridge { dump | clear }  
Parameters  
dump  
Dumps a list of all the addresses in the bridge table.  
clear  
Clears the bridge table.  
Examples  
This example displays the dumping of the bridge table.  
[296]bridge dump  
Hash table for Bridge Group 0:  
MAC Address  
Source Interface  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Link 16  
00:00:92:90:CF:42  
00:00:92:90:CD:42  
00:40:72:00:D2:43  
00:60:47:CC:DB:43  
00:00:92:90:CF:44  
00:A0:C9:25:9A:B1  
00:40:72:00:73:B8  
00:40:72:00:41:C7  
00:00:92:90:95:C8  
00:00:92:90:C7:CE  
00:10:4B:64:25:CF  
00:00:92:90:0C:D0  
00:00:92:9B:58:D3  
00:00:92:B6:3A:D5  
00:00:0E:3A:02:D5  
00:10:83:F5:A5:D8  
00:00:92:90:96:DB  
00:00:92:90:95:DF  
00:40:72:00:AF:E7  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Link 16  
9-21  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: creset  
creset  
Description  
This command resets the error counters for a link or a range of links. There is no  
output for this command. To see if the error counters were reset for the links you  
specified, enter command staslc on page 9-92.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
creset range  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport creset range  
Parameters  
range  
Defines the link or a range of links being reset. Valid values are:  
z
z
z
z
A single link number (for example, 3to reset error counters for link  
3)  
A series of link numbers separated by commas (for example, 1,2,3  
to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)  
A range of link numbers separated by a dash (for example, 1-2to  
reset error counters for links 1 and 2)  
Any combination of a single link number, series, and/or range (for  
example, 1,2-3to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)  
z * to reset error counters for all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Examples  
This example displays the resetting of error counters for links 5 to 7.  
[296]creset 5-7  
[296]  
9-22  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: date  
date  
Description  
This command sets and displays the date and the time for AI296 when it is operating  
in standalone mode.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
date  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of date 08-04-2005and time 10:24:49for AI296  
in standalone mode.  
[296]date  
Today is Thursday 05-01-2004 01:09:52  
Please enter the date and/or time.  
Use 'MM-DD-YYYY' and/or 'hh:mm:ss' (24-hour format): 08-04-2004 10:24:49  
[296]  
9-23  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: debug  
debug  
Description  
This command enables or disables the logging of debugging data.  
Tip: You have to have logging turned on to view debug information from a shell  
connection.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
debug { alias | x25 | pvcfsm | asypvcfsm | nlipvcfsm | tpifsm |  
modmuxfsm | allfsm | pppfsm | linkChange | bootp | all } { on | off }  
Parameters  
alias  
Enables or disables the logging of alias translation debugging data.  
x25  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
pvcfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
asypvcfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
nlipvcfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
tpifsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
modmuxfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
allfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
pppfsm  
Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
bootp  
Enables or disables the logging of bootp attempts so that users can  
determine if the bootp process is still underway or if it has been  
completed.  
linkChange  
Enables or disables the logging of debugging data when the PPP  
protocol on a link has gone down.  
all  
Enables or disables the logging of all debugging data.  
on  
Enables the logging of specified debugging data.  
off  
Disables the logging of specified debugging data.  
9-24  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: debug  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of all debug data logging.  
[296]debug all on  
debug alias is on  
debug x25 is on  
debug pvcfsm is on  
debug asypvcfsm is on  
debug nlipvcfsm is on  
debug tpifsm is on  
debug modmuxfsm is on  
debug allfsm is on  
debug pppfsm is on  
debug linkChange is on  
debug mltfsm is on  
debug bootp is on  
[296]  
9-25  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: delete  
delete  
Description  
This command deletes a specified file that resides on AI296.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
delete filename  
Parameters  
filename  
Defines the name of the file to delete.  
Examples  
This example displays the deletion of file log.txt.  
[296]delete log.txt  
Are you sure you want to delete 'log.txt'? (y/n) y  
log.txt deleted.  
[296]  
9-26  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-conn  
diag-conn  
Description  
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for  
each link. Data can be displayed continuously, one page at a time, or sent to the  
screen one time only for all connections. The default mode is a continuous display.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-conn  
Examples  
This example displays existing connections across AI296.  
C O N N E C T I O N S Mode: Continuous [Search Inactive]  
103. ASY.1.1  
113. TCP 172.16.2.9#1032  
[ Idle  
<--Data Transfer-->  
]
SHELL  
Enter S-kip, I-nternal, A-ll, M-ore, D-etail, F-ind, P-revPg, N-extPg or Q-uit:  
Note: For explanations of the states shown, such as idle and data transfer, refer to  
Display Item Description  
S-kip  
This option bypasses connections. It gives a prompt for the number  
of connections to skip.  
I-nternal  
This option toggles between I-nternal and H-ide Int. I-nternal  
displays all the internal loopback connections along with other  
connections.  
A-ll  
This option displays all connections without page breaks. The  
display does not show duplicate connections. For example, if  
connection number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30  
to 15 will not appear.  
M-ore  
This option toggles between M-oreand L-ess. It displays the link and  
PVC number for X.25 PVCs, the link and X.121 addresses for X.25  
SVCs, and the alias used to make the connection.  
9-27  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-conn  
Display Item Description  
D-etail  
This option prompts for the ID of the connection to view and  
displays details for that connection.  
F-ind  
This option displays specific types of connections. F-ind indicates  
text matches that are applied to the display lines. The matching is  
not case-sensitive. The logic for the matches can be AND or OR.  
PATTERN 1, LOGIC 2, and PATTERN 3 are evaluated before  
LOGIC 4 and PATTERN 5 are considered.  
P-revPg  
This option displays the previous page of connections. Twenty  
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of  
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers  
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display  
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection  
number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not  
appear.  
N-extPg  
This option displays the next page of connections. Twenty  
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of  
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers  
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display  
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection  
15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear.  
Q-uit  
This option exits the command display and returns the user to the  
prompt.  
9-28  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
diag-eth  
Description  
This command monitors and displays Ethernet diagnostic information.  
Using Interpretation Mode  
There are three levels of diagnostic information:  
z
z
z
Minimum—Displays minimal diagnostic information (mostly the packet’s source  
and destination). This is the default interpretation mode setting.  
Medium—Displays protocol fields that are likely to change for each packet, as  
well as those with values that are out of the ordinary.  
Maximum—Displays all protocol fields.  
To configure interpretation mode:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter interpret minimum, interpret medium, interpret maximum, or  
interpret.  
Tip: Entering interpretwith no additional parameter toggles interpretation off  
and on. When interpretation is toggled from off to on, the diagnostic level is  
set to the minimum level (the default).  
Using the Timestamp Option  
Timestamps can be configured to appear on the diagnostic display. The timestamp  
value displays the calendar date and time.  
To enable or disable timestamp display:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter timestampto toggle between enabling and disabling the display of the  
timestamp.  
Using Promiscuous Mode  
Promiscuous mode can be enabled or disabled during Ethernet diagnostic sessions.  
By disabling promiscuous mode, only packets traveling on the network that are  
destined for your Ethernet card appear. By enabling promiscuous mode, all the  
packets traveling on the network appear.  
To enable and disable promiscuous mode:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter promiscuousto toggle between enabling and disabling promiscuous mode.  
9-29  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
Note: Operating AI296 in the promiscuous mode can reduce performance. The  
default setting is disabled promiscuous mode. AI296 automatically returns  
to the default setting (promiscuous mode disabled) when the user quits  
the diag-ethcommand.  
Using the Help Option  
To obtain command help:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter help. The diag-ethhelp screen appears.  
Configuring Filters  
While using the diag-ethcommand, various filters can be defined to display specific  
or general diagnostic information.  
Tip: There is help associated with the filtercommand. To view this help, enter  
filterafter you enter diag-eth. The filterhelp screen appears.  
Important: If you are connecting to AI296 using Telnet, remember to filter out the  
traffic associated with the telnet connection. Failure to do so can cause  
the diagnostic program to become overloaded, which makes AI296  
unresponsive.  
To configure a filter:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter the desired filter. Refer to section Formats on page 9-31 for information on  
filter formats.  
Capturing Data  
While using the diag-ethcommand, data can be captured for Ethernet diagnostics.  
All variables and filters can be configured for specific or general information capture.  
To configure data capture:  
1. Define the following settings:  
z
z
z
z
z
Interpretation Mode  
Timestamp Mode  
Promiscuous Mode  
Data Mode  
Filters  
9-30  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
2. Enter go. The system starts capturing data with the user-defined settings and  
filters.  
3. Enter stopto stop capturing data.  
Exiting the diag-eth Session  
To exit the diag-ethsession, type quit. The [296] prompt appears.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-eth  
The following formats apply to filters:  
filter { add | delete } [ src mac_address ] [ dst mac_address ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address ] [ dst ip_address ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address#port_number ]  
[ dst ip_address#port_number ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src *#port_number ] [ dst *#port_number ]  
filter { add | delete } protocol [ ip | tcp | udp | icmp | arp | osi ]  
filter { add | delete } all  
filter list  
Parameters  
add  
Adds a filter.  
delete  
Deletes a filter.  
src  
Defines the source address (MAC, IP, or TCP/UDP)  
for the filter being created.  
mac_address  
Defines the MAC address to use for either the source  
or destination of the filter being created.  
dst  
Defines the destination address (MAC, IP, or  
TCP/UDP) for the filter being created.  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address to use for either the source or  
destination of the filter being created.  
ip_address#port_number  
Defines the IP address and the TCP/UDP port number  
for either the source or destination of the filter being  
created.  
9-31  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
*#port_number  
protocol  
Defines the TCP/UDP port number regardless of the  
MAC/IP address settings.  
Adds or deletes a specific protocol filter. Available  
protocol filters are:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
ip  
tcp  
udp  
icmp  
arp  
osi.  
all  
Deletes all the filters or adds a filter to show all  
Ethernet traffic.  
list  
Lists all the filters in the system.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of diagnostic interpretation level mediumfor the  
Ethernet diagnostic session display.  
[296]diag-eth  
interpret medium  
Interpretation is now set to MEDIUM.  
This example displays the enabling and disabling of the timestamp display.  
[296]diag-eth  
timestamp  
Timestamps will now be displayed.  
timestamp  
Timestamps will no longer be displayed.  
This example displays the enabling and disabling of promiscuous mode.  
[296]diag-eth  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in normal mode.  
9-32  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays Ethernet diagnostic help information.  
[296]diag-eth  
help  
Commands for diag-eth:  
interpret  
quit  
help  
Turn on data interpretation.  
Exit diag-eth.  
Display this help text.  
Toggle uninterpreted data display.  
Toggle data timestamping.  
Begin data capturing.  
Terminate data capturing.  
Add a data filter.  
data  
timestamp  
go  
stop  
filter  
promiscuous Toggle promiscuous mode for the ethernet chip.  
This example displays the help associated with the Ethernet diagnostic filter  
command.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter  
Usage: FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <mac>] [DST <mac>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <ipAddr>] [DST <ipAddr>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <ipAddr#port>] [DST <ipAddr#port>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <*#port>] [DST <*#port>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> PROTOCOL <IP|TCP|UDP|ICMP|ARP|OSI>  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> ALL  
FILTER LIST  
Where:  
<mac>  
is the MAC address desired, with the format  
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX, with each 'X' representing  
a hexidecimal digit.  
<ipAddr>  
<port>  
is the desired IP address, with the format  
X.X.X.X, where 0 < X < 256.  
is the desired TCP port.  
9-33  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following parameters  
are entered:  
z interpret max to set maximum interpretation  
z timestamp to enable timestamping  
z promiscuous to enable promiscuous mode  
z filter add src 172.16.2.9 to add a filter for address 172.16.2.9  
z data to display data  
z go to start the data capture  
z stop to stop capturing data.  
[296]diag-eth  
interpret max  
Interpretation is now set to MAXIMUM.  
timestamp  
Timestamps will now be displayed.  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.  
filter add src 172.16.2.9  
New filter added.  
data  
Uninterpreted data will now be displayed.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Timestamp: 11-10-2006 02:33:54.74  
<- Ethernet: [ 00:40:72:00:7F:96 ] -> [ 00:00:0C:7E:F2:72 ]  
Protocol [ 0x0800:IP ]  
IP:  
[ 172.16.2.9 ] -> [ 172.16.0.1 ]  
Version [ 4 ]  
Header Length [ 20 bytes ]  
Type-Of-Service [ none ]  
Identifier [ 37903 ]  
Fragmentation Flags [ none ] Offset [ 0 bytes ]  
Time-To-Live [ 60 hops ]  
Protocol [ 0x01:ICMP ]  
ICMP:  
Type [ 8 ] Code [ 0 ]  
(echo request)  
00 00 48 44 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C  
4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42  
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52  
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 4A 4B 4C  
..HDABCDEFGHIJKL  
MNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB  
CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZABCDEFGH  
IJKL  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
stop  
9-34  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:  
z filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9to configure a filter with source MAC address  
00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
z filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9 to configure a filter with destination MAC  
address 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
z go to start the capture  
z stop to end the capture.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
New filter added.  
filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
New filter added.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 01 80 C2 00 00 00 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 26 42 42  
03 00 00 00 00 81 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 00  
00 00 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 80 65 00 00 07 00  
09 00 0F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
.......@r....&BB  
....... .@r.....  
............  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 40 72 00 7F 96 08 00 45 00  
00 29 0F 81 00 00 3C 06 F4 8A AC 10 02 09 AC 10  
20 9A 04 16 00 17 75 87 E4 2F 30 E0 B6 B4 50 10  
08 00 A6 96 00 00 41 0D 01 B4 6D 74 01 B4 FF FC  
.)....<.........  
.....u../0...P.  
......A...mt....  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- stop  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:  
z filter add protocol tcp to configure a filter with a defined TCP protocol  
z go to start the capture  
z stop to end the capture.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter add protocol tcp  
New filter added.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 00 A0 C9 22 D8 C4 00 00 92 B6 2F 97 08 00 45 2C  
00 6C CF B7 40 00 80 06 69 4B AC 10 37 14 AC 10  
32 28 10 9A 00 8B 01 67 55 24 00 D0 5D 81 50 18  
1E 59 5C 61 00 00 00 00 00 40 FF 53 4D 42 2B 00  
00 00 00 18 03 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 07 08 FE CA 02 10 41 0F 01 01 00 1B 00 4C  
57 4F 20 43 57 20 56 4C 4F 20 44 45 4F 20 4D 41  
57 20 4C 4D 57 20 41 52 57 00  
..."....../...E,  
2(.....gU$..].P.  
................  
........A......L  
WO CW VLO DEO MA  
W LMW ARW.  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
stop  
9-35  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when filter list is entered to  
display all filters.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter list  
Filters currently being used by diag-eth:  
protocol tcp  
dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
dst 172.16.2.9  
src 172.16.2.9  
protocol tcp  
This example displays the deletion of filter protocol tcp.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter delete protocol tcp  
Filter 'protocol tcp' has been deleted.  
This example displays the deletion of all filters.  
[296]diag-eth  
filter delete all  
Filter 'dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'dst 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'src 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.  
9-36  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
diag-info  
Description  
This command displays diagnostic information for WAN, asynchronous, Ethernet, and  
TCP connections as well as for memory. Different screens of information can be  
viewed depending on the command option that is entered. The screens display the  
state of serial links and system updates once per second. The available display  
options are W, M, A, E, and T. They display the following information:  
z
z
z
z
z
Option W displays WAN diagnostic information. W is the default display.  
Option M displays the STREAMS allocation and memory information.  
Option A displays asynchronous information.  
Option E displays Ethernet information.  
Option T displays TCP data.  
Note: Type Xto exit the command display.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-info  
9-37  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
Examples  
This example displays the WAN Diag Info screen, which is accessed by typing W.  
W A N  
D I A G  
I N F O  
LINK  
1
STATE TX_PEND RX_WANT NO_BUF  
BYTE_IN  
BYTE_OUT  
759050  
30  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Enter W-an, M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Column Description  
LINK  
Displays the link number.  
STATE  
Displays the state of the WAN driver. Two states are available:  
z
0 means the X.25 frame level is not established.  
30 means the X.25 frame level is established.  
z
TX_PEND  
RX_WANT  
NO_BUF  
Displays the state of the transaction if one is pending for transmission.  
Displays the state of the buffer if another buffer is needed.  
Displays the number of times the receiver cannot be started because no  
buffers were available.  
BYTE_IN  
Displays the count of the number of bytes coming in.  
Displays the count of the number of bytes going out.  
BYTE_OUT  
This example displays diagnostic information for STREAMS allocation and memory,  
which are accessed by typing M.  
9-38  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
S T R E A M S  
A L L O C A T I O N  
NAME  
Queues  
Streams  
FREE  
8361  
2085  
64  
ALLOC  
239  
115  
0
%FREE  
97  
94  
USED  
1073  
532  
FAIL  
HWM  
241  
116  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bufcalls  
Timeouts  
Message blocks  
Data blocks:  
Class 0  
100  
99  
97  
0
2387  
16015  
13  
369  
402908  
588495  
45  
551  
1519  
4080  
14944  
9981  
500  
17  
16  
56  
19  
0
98  
99  
7954  
835  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
40  
18  
64  
32  
0
Class 1  
Class 2  
99  
99  
100  
60  
301866  
11034  
0
Class 3  
Class 4  
Class 5  
Class 6  
Extended  
390  
260  
1
0
222746  
1
263  
1
0
1
350  
50  
100  
0
S Y S T E M  
A L L O C A T I O N  
(alloc failed=0)  
USED USED_HWM UNIT_SIZE  
REGION:  
AI1  
AI2  
ASIZ CNT CNT_HWM  
741664  
741664  
741664  
324  
0
424  
0
17632  
0
20704  
0
180832  
32  
32  
32  
AI3  
32  
36 179296  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Column Description  
NAME  
Displays the name of the STREAMS resource.  
FREE  
Displays the number of free or available STREAMS resources.  
ALLOC  
Displays the number of STREAMS resources allocated at the time of  
the display.  
%FREE  
USED  
Displays the percent of free or available STREAMS resources.  
Displays the number of STREAMS resources used since the card was  
last rebooted.  
FAIL  
HWM  
Displays the number of times an allocation failed.  
Displays the highest number of resources ever allocated at one time.  
Displays the memory allocation regions.  
REGION  
ASIZ  
CNT  
Displays the size of the memory allocation regions in bytes.  
Displays the number of blocks allocated from a region (regardless of  
size).  
CNT_HWM  
USED  
Displays the highest number of blocks allocated since the card was last  
rebooted.  
Displays the number of bytes currently allocated from a region.  
9-39  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
Column Description  
USED_HWM  
Displays the highest number of bytes allocated since the card was last  
rebooted.  
UNIT_SIZE  
Displays the size in bytes of the memory units that can be allocated.  
This example displays diagnostic information for asynchronous connections, which is  
accessed by typing A.  
ASYNC DIAG INFO  
LINK  
1
STATE  
BYTES_IN  
BYTES_OUT  
LINK  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
STATE  
BYTES_IN  
BYTES_OUT  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Column Description  
LINK  
Displays the link number.  
STATE  
Displays the state of the driver. Two states are available:  
z 0 specifies that the link is not established.  
z 1 specifies that the link is enabled. The link does not have to have a  
connection to be enabled.  
BYTE_IN  
Displays the number of bytes coming into the link.  
Displays the number of bytes going out of the link.  
BYTE_OUT  
9-40  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
This example displays diagnostic information for the front panel Ethernet interface,  
which is accessed by typing E.  
ETHERNET 0  
Rx LG frame length violation: ---0  
Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame: ---0  
Rx SH short frame (runt): -------0  
Rx CR CRC error: ----------------0  
Rx OV overrun: ------------------0  
Rx CL collision: ----------------0  
Rx BSY buffers exhausted: -------0  
Rx frames missed: ---------------0  
Rx frames received: -------------0  
Rx bytes received: --------------0  
Tx RL retry limit exceeded: -----0  
Tx RC collisions: ---------------0  
Tx UN underruns: ----------------0  
Tx LC late collisions:-----------0  
Tx CSL carrier sense lost: ------2451095  
Tx queued buffers: --------------0  
Tx frames sent: -----------------2451095  
Tx bytes sent: ------------------233814304  
Unexpected interrupts: ----------0  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Display Item  
Description  
Rx LG frame length violation  
Displays the number of frame length violations in  
received packets.  
Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame  
Rx SH short frame (runt)  
Rx CR CRC error  
Displays the number of misaligned, received frames.  
Displays the number of short received frames.  
Displays the number of packets received that have  
had CRC errors.  
Rx OV overrun  
Displays the number of packets not received by the  
interface because of a receiver overrun.  
Rx CL collision  
Displays the transmit collisions on received frames.  
This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes  
to transmit but cannot because someone else is  
already transmitting.  
Rx BSY buffers exhausted  
Rx frames missed  
Displays the number of times all receive buffers  
were used, but more were required.  
Displays the number of frames that were supposed  
to be received, but were missed.  
9-41  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
Rx frames received  
Displays the number of frames received on the  
connection.  
Rx bytes received  
Displays the number of bytes received on the  
connection.  
Tx RL retry limit exceeded  
Tx RC collisions  
Displays the number of times transmitted frames  
exceeded the retry limit.  
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is  
the number of times the Ethernet device goes to  
transmit but cannot because someone else is  
already transmitting.  
Tx UN underruns  
This displays the number of times the transmitter  
has run out of data due to the system being busy.  
Tx LC late collisions  
Tx CSL carrier sense lost  
Displays the number of late collisions on transmitted  
frames.  
Displays the number of times that the carrier sense  
was lost.  
Tx queued buffers  
Tx frames sent  
Displays the number of queued buffers.  
Displays the number of frames that were  
transmitted.  
Tx bytes sent  
Displays the number of bytes that were transmitted.  
Unexpected interrupts  
Displays the number of times that the transfer of  
frames was unexpectedly interrupted.  
9-42  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
This example displays diagnostic information for the Ethernet sonic chip in use on this  
card (SONIC0), which is accessed by typing E.  
SONIC0  
frames_received  
bytes_received  
frames_sent  
2133706  
2451073  
204088549 233809600  
317511  
bytes_sent  
collisions  
38293966  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
116  
0
0
transmit_errors  
crc_errors  
alignment_errors  
missed_packets  
rx_buffers_exhausted 0  
0
0
heartbeatlost  
rx_overruns  
rba_exceeded  
current_tda  
ex_defers  
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
ex_coll  
tx_underruns  
bad_tx_size  
tx_blocked  
tx_delayed  
state  
0
0
2451086  
0
2451086  
eth intr stuck: 0----------------233812081  
Display Item  
Description  
frames_received  
bytes_received  
Displays the number of frames received on the connection.  
Displays the number of bytes received on the connection.  
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches  
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation  
and does not indicate an error.  
frames_sent  
bytes_sent  
Displays the number of frames sent from the connection.  
Displays the number of bytes sent from the connection.  
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches  
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation  
and does not indicate an error.  
collisions  
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is the  
number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but  
cannot because someone else is already transmitting.  
transmit_errors  
Displays the number of transmit errors that have occurred.  
9-43  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
crc_errors  
Displays the number of packets received that have had CRC  
errors.  
alignment_errors  
missed_packets  
Displays the number of alignment errors.  
Displays the number of missed packets.  
rx_buffers_exhausted  
Displays the number of times all receive buffers were used,  
but more were required.  
heartbeatlost  
rx_overruns  
rba_exceeded  
Displays if there is an error between the Ethernet interface  
and the Ethernet transceiver.  
Displays the number of packets not received by the interface  
because of a receiver overrun.  
Displays the number of times that the maximum number of  
receive buffers have been exceeded.  
current_tda  
ex_defers  
Displays the current data area being transmitted.  
Displays the number of times that the maximum limit on the  
excessive deferral timer is exceeded. An excessive deferral  
error is recorded when the following events occur:  
z
A transmission attempt is made while another node is  
transmitting.  
z
The transmit period is longer than the excessive deferral  
timer limit.  
ex_coll  
Displays the number of times an excessive collision has  
been recorded. An excessive collision is recorded when a  
transmit attempt occurs 16 times and a collision occurs each  
time.  
tx_underruns  
bad_tx_size  
tx_blocked  
tx_delayed  
Displays the number of times the transmitter has run out of  
data due to the system being busy.  
Displays the number of times the transmit byte count was  
incorrect.  
Displays a 1 if the transmitter is blocked. Otherwise, a 0 is  
displayed.  
Displays the number of times the transmitter has been  
blocked.  
9-44  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
state  
Displays the current state of the Ethernet interface. The  
following values may appear:  
z 0—The Ethernet interface is uninitialized.  
z 1—The Ethernet interface is idle.  
z 2—The Ethernet interface is active.  
z 3—The Ethernet interface needs to be reset.  
eth intr stuck  
Displays the number of times the Ethernet interface interrupt  
has stuck while servicing the interrupt.  
This example displays diagnostic information for TCP data, which is accessed by  
typing T.  
T C P / I P  
I N F O  
Copied ethernet receive packet:  
TCP keepalive failed:  
0
0
1
0
TCP max keepalive tries:  
Dropped SNMP request:  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Display Item  
Description  
Copied ethernet receive packet:  
Displays the number of copied Ethernet receive  
packets.  
TCP keepalive failed:  
Displays the number of TCP keep-alive  
messages that have been sent and were  
expected to be received, but were not received.  
TCP max keepalive tries:  
Dropped SNMP request:  
Displays the maximum number of TCP keep-alive  
messages received on the connection.  
Displays the number of dropped SNMP requests.  
9-45  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-line  
diag-line  
Description  
This command monitors incoming and outgoing asynchronous traffic and displays  
diagnostic information for the traffic. A help screen provides a list of commands  
available for line monitoring diagnostics.  
CAUTION: The line monitor degrades the performance of AI296. Do not use this  
command in heavy traffic situations in which performance is crucial.  
Note: Information from the line monitor diagnostic mode only appears when data is  
passed on serial links. If no data is passed, the screen is blank.  
Table 9-2 displays the line monitor mode options that can be entered after diag-line  
is entered.  
Table 9-2 Line Monitor Mode Options  
Option  
data  
modem  
t
Function  
Toggles the display of data on or off.  
Toggles the display of modem signals on or off.  
Toggles the display of a timestamp for each frame of data  
displayed on or off.  
h or r  
Hides (h) or reveals (r) all lines on AI296.  
Hides (h) or reveals (r) a specified line (x).  
Reveals a specified LCN (y) on a specified line (x).  
h lx or r lx  
r lx y  
r lx y z  
Reveals a range of specified LCNs (y through z) on a  
specified line (x).  
h lx y - or r lx y -  
Hides or reveals all LCNs from a specified LCN (y) on up on a  
specified line (x).  
h lx -y or r lx -y  
Hides or reveals all LCNs from 0 to a specified LCN (y) on a  
specified line (x).  
filterL2  
Toggles the filtering of level 2 frames without packet  
information on or off.  
9-46  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-line  
Table 9-2 Line Monitor Mode Options (Continued)  
Option  
Function  
interpret [ a | x ]  
Toggles the display of decoded packet data on the line  
monitor on or off and optionally selects the format of the data  
in the data portion of the packet (a or x).  
z a displays the data in the data portion of the packet in  
ASCII/hexadecimal format. Unprintable data  
(hexadecimal values 0x00 to 0x20 and 0x7F to 0xFF)  
appears as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by  
a space. Printable data appears as printable characters.  
This option only applies to data.  
z x displays all the data in the data portion of the packet in  
hexadecimal format. All data appears as two-digit  
hexadecimal numbers separated by a space. This option  
only applies to data.  
print  
Prints the range of revealed LCNs for all lines.  
Pauses the line monitor.  
CTRL+s  
go or CTRL+q  
Reactivates the line monitor after displaying the line monitor  
options.  
ESC or q  
Quits monitoring traffic, exits from the line monitor, and  
returns to the prompt.  
?
Displays a list of the options available for line monitoring  
diagnostics.  
Tip: Press ENTER to execute a command and press ESC to end the diagnostic  
session.  
CAUTION: If you are connected to AI296 through a serial port, do not monitor the  
port with command diag-line. Use command hideto hide and not  
monitor the port. Failure to comply with this statement can cause AI296  
to become unresponsive.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-line  
9-47  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-line  
Examples  
This example displays a typical default line monitor display for asynchronous data.  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 92 9B  
59 0C 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 00 92 9B  
59 0C AC 10 32 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 22 79  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1............  
Y...............  
Y...2........."y  
................  
..  
06<d FF 03 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F  
77 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F 77 80 04 00  
00 14 00 02 00 0F 00  
.......  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D AC 10 33 D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 20 EB  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1..........K.  
.]............K.  
.]..3......... .  
................  
..  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D AC 10 33 D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 1E 82  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1..........K.  
.]............K.  
.]..3...........  
................  
..  
Column  
Description  
Line number  
Displays the line number, which can range from 01 to 32.  
Direction indicator  
Displays the direction indicator for the line. One of the  
following appears:  
z > for transmitted frames  
z < for received frames.  
Frame type indicator Displays the frame type indicator for the line. One of the  
following appears:  
z d for asynchronous links  
z
Blank for other frames or packets.  
Data  
If the data field byte count is disabled, it gets displayed as  
ct: <# of bytes in data field>. If the data display is enabled  
and only present in data packets, then the data byte count is  
displayed as <ASCII STRING>.  
9-48  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: diag-tconn  
diag-tconn  
Description  
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for  
each link. It displays all connections on AI296 in the same format as command diag-  
conn on page 9-27, but it is not interactive.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
diag-tconn  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport diag-tconn  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Examples  
This example displays active connections on AI296. This is a partial display. The rest  
of the response follows the pattern below for the remaining connections.  
[296] diag-tconn  
TIDMUXsw#1  
13:26:30 040900 Sev=F Base=032 Msg:  
AI232 Complete Connections Dump:  
1. PARENT2  
3. TCP 172.16.31.45#5001  
TID(s): SONEPLEX-NE3  
<-----> 32.ASY.2.1  
<-----> PARENT2.1  
SONEPLEX-NE4  
15. TCP 192.168.31.15#5001  
TID(s): NE4-DAYTON-OH  
NE7-DAYTON-OH  
<-----> PARENT2.2  
NE5-DAYTON-OH  
NE8-DAYTON-OH  
NE6-DAYTON-OH  
NE9-DAYTON-OH  
[296]  
Note: The connection ID is the first number that appears for each connection. For  
example, the connection ID for connection PARENT2 is 1.  
9-49  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: dir  
dir  
Description  
This command displays a list of files with associated times, dates, permissions, and  
sizes.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
dir [ -l ]  
Parameters  
-l  
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,  
time, date, and file size. The lscommand with this option is the same as the  
dircommand.  
Examples  
This example displays all available files.  
[296]dir  
boot.ini  
boot.img  
232.img  
log.txt  
primary.cnf  
[296]  
This example displays all available files with permission, size, time, and date  
information.  
[296]dir -l  
-rw-r--r--  
-r--r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
[296]  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
0
0
0
0
0
143 Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini  
2175720 Aug 15 09:54 boot.img  
22061 Jun 1 00:00 log.txt  
4342 Aug 15 08:21 core.txt  
7092 Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf  
9-50  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: exit  
exit  
Description  
This command ends the current shell session and returns to the login prompt.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
exit  
Examples  
This example displays an exit from the current shell session.  
[296]exit  
Writing Configuration ...  
Goodbye.  
Valid destinations are as follows:  
AI  
Enter destination name (or "EXIT" to logout):  
>
9-51  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: head  
head  
Description  
This command displays the first few lines of a file.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
head [ -n lines ] file_name ...  
Parameters  
[ -nlines] Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.  
file_name  
Defines the name of the file to display.  
Note: Several filenames can be entered with this command.  
Examples  
This example displays the first 30 lines of file core.txt.  
[296]head -n 30 core.txt  
296 crash dump at 14:16:30, 07-20-2004 (up 0 days 00:31:46):  
Version 96HPC960.000007 created on 2004-03-29 at 09:43:35  
Crash Code= 000000ad  
PC= 00000000  
SP= 00000000  
IMMR= 00000000  
MSR= 00000000  
GPR00= 00000000  
GPR03= 00000000  
GPR06= 00000000  
GPR09= 00000000  
GPR12= 00000000  
GPR15= 00000000  
GPR18= 00000000  
GPR21= 00000000  
GPR24= 00000000  
GPR27= 00000000  
GPR30= 00000000  
CR= 00000000  
GPR01= 00000000  
GPR04= 00000000  
GPR07= 00000000  
GPR10= 00000000  
GPR13= 00000000  
GPR16= 00000000  
GPR19= 00000000  
GPR22= 00000000  
GPR25= 00000000  
GPR28= 00000000  
GPR31= 00000000  
GPR02= 00000000  
GPR05= 00000000  
GPR08= 00000000  
GPR11= 00000000  
GPR14= 00000000  
GPR17= 00000000  
GPR20= 00000000  
GPR23= 00000000  
GPR26= 00000000  
GPR29= 00000000  
SSR0= 00000000  
XER= 00000000  
SSR1= 00000000  
CTR= 00000000  
LR= 00000000  
PVR= 00500000  
Stack dump:  
PSOS1= 00000000 PSOS2= 00000000  
PSOS3= 00000000  
Caller  
[see LR]  
200082c0: 9421 ffc8 7c08 02a6 bea1 000c 9001 003c  
200082d0: 7c7f 1b78 3ae0 0000 4800 1419 7c76 1b78  
200082e0: 56d6 001e 3b16 3e82 a338 0000 572c 043e  
200082f0: 7d96 6214 3bcc 2004 82be 0000 7ebd ab78  
20008300: 7fe3 fb78 4801 76bd 7c7c 1b78 578a 043e  
20008310: 2c0a 0100 4081 0008 3b80 0100 3b60 0000  
20008320: 576c 043e 578b 043e 7c0c 5800 4080 001c  
[296]  
9-52  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: help  
help  
Description  
This command lists all available system commands or information for a specific  
command.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
help [ command ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport help [ command ]  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
command  
Defines the name of the command for which specific information will be  
displayed.  
Examples  
This example displays a list of all available commands.  
[296]help  
The following commands are available:  
*ftplogin  
*telnetlogin  
alarm  
arp  
break  
diag-tconn  
dir  
more  
pad  
staslc  
syncflash  
tail  
tcpoutconn  
tftp  
exit  
head  
help  
id  
passwd  
ping  
pppstatus  
profile  
pvcedit  
pvclist  
reset  
bridge  
creset  
tftpboot  
trace  
type  
ip  
debug  
delete  
diag-conn  
diag-eth  
diag-info  
diag-line  
link  
linkstat  
log  
useradd  
userdel  
users  
sholog  
show  
logout  
ls  
menu  
staeia  
standalone  
who  
xvc  
[296]  
9-53  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: help  
This example displays help information for command show.  
[296]help show  
Usage: show [perf | comments | conn | data | mem | tcp | wan | tconn |  
pvc | eth | ip | router | version | log | crash | inventory |  
ports]  
[296]  
9-54  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: id  
id  
Description  
This command displays the current user name and profile.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
id  
Examples  
This example displays the current user name and profile.  
[296]id  
Username: 'pubs'  
Profile: 'supervisor'  
[296]  
9-55  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: ip  
ip  
Description  
This command displays the following system settings:  
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
Subnet mask  
High IP address  
Primary router IP address  
Backup router IP address  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ip  
Examples  
This example displays the configured IP address information.  
[296]ip  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask High IP Address  
-------------------------------------------------------  
010.040.057.015  
255.255.000.000  
010.040.057.015  
Router IP Address  
-------------------------  
010.040.000.001 (Default)  
No backup router  
[296]  
9-56  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: ip init  
ip init  
Note: This command is only valid when AI296 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command configures the following settings for AI296 in standalone mode:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
Subnet mask  
High IP address  
Primary gateway address  
Backup gateway address  
IP address range  
CAUTION: The following message appears when the “ip init” command is invoked  
and no login ports are configured:  
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take  
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ip init  
Examples  
This example displays the prompt that appears when ip initis entered. A prompt  
appears for each configurable IP address item.  
[296] ip init  
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):  
9-57  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: ip init  
This example displays the configuration of all the IP settings available with this  
command:  
[296] ip init  
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.2.39  
Setting IP Address to 172.16.2.39  
Enter Subnet Mask (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):255.255.000.000  
Setting Subnet Mask to 255.255.000.000  
Enter Router Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.000.1  
Setting Router Address to 172.16.000.1  
Enter Backup Router Address (default none):172.16.2.41  
Setting Backup Router Address to 172.16.2.41  
Enter IP Address Range (default 1):  
Setting range to 1  
[296]  
9-58  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: link  
link  
Description  
This command is used to:  
z
Force a serial link to connect or disconnect  
Note: When this command is used to disconnect a serial link, all calls are torn  
down. The serial link does not come back online until command link  
startis issued.  
Important: If you are connected to the AI296 shell using a serial port, remember  
not to disable that port or else loss of connectivity will result.  
z
z
Restart a link, which is a stop followed by a start  
Show a configuration summary for a link or range of links.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
link { link_range | * } { restart | start | stop }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport link { link_range | * } { start | stop | restart }  
Parameters  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
Note: This parameter applies to any action the user is trying  
perform (start, stop, restart, or show information).  
restart  
Restarts the serial links.  
start  
Enables the serial links.  
stop  
Disables the serial links.  
9-59  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: link  
Examples  
This example displays the starting of links 1 through 4 and 6.  
[296]link 1-4,6 start  
[296]  
This example displays the stopping of links 6 and 8.  
[296]link 6,8 stop  
[296]  
9-60  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: linkstat  
linkstat  
Description  
This command displays link statistic information.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the AI296 system command:  
linkstat  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport linkstat  
Parameters  
baseport  
Indicates the baseport number of AI296.  
9-61  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: linkstat  
Examples  
This example displays the link statistic information for AI296.  
[296]linkstat  
E
Link N  
D R C D F P  
T T T C R K Speed  
Conn  
Rx/Pkt  
Rx/Bytes  
Tx/Pkt  
Tx/Bytes Rx  
/CRC Rx/Abt Rx/Ovr Tx/Und Intf  
R S S D M T  
1: +Asy + + - -  
A
9600,n,8,1 0  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
0
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
4: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
5: -DCE  
0
6: +DCE + + - - - -  
- - -  
0
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7: -DCE  
0
0
0
0
- - -  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
0
8: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
9: -DCE  
0
10: -DCE  
- - -  
0
- - -  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
12: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
13: -DCE  
0
14: -DCE  
- - -  
0
- - -  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
16: -DCE  
0
[296]  
- - -  
0
9-62  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: linkstat  
This example displays link statistic information for the device at baseport 64.  
AI198AISwitch Shell Connection 22  
>winslc 64 linkstat  
AI198AISwitch Shell Connection 22  
>@AI19815:40:40 072204 Sev=F Base=064 Msg:  
E
Link N  
D R C D F P  
T T T C R K Speed  
Conn  
Rx/Pkt  
Rx/Bytes  
Tx/Pkt  
Tx/Bytes Rx  
/CRC Rx/Abt Rx/Ovr Tx/Und Intf  
R S S D M T  
1: +Asy + + - -  
A
9600,n,8,1 0  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
0
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
4: +DCE + + - - - -  
0
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
5: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
6: +DCE + + - - - -  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7: -DCE  
0
0
0
0
- - -  
0
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
8: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
9: -DCE  
0
10: -DCE  
- - -  
0
- - -  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
@AI19815:40:41 072204 Sev=F Base=064 Msg:  
- - -  
0
12: -DCE  
0
9600  
0 RS-232  
0
0
0
0
0
0
13: -DCE  
0
14: -DCE  
0
15: -DCE  
- - -  
0
- - -  
0
- - -  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 RS-232  
9600  
0 RS-232  
16: -DCE  
0
- - -  
0
Note: The example has the terminal option set to 80 columns. Setting the terminal to  
132 columns is recommended.  
9-63  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: log  
log  
Description  
This command turns the display of log messages on or off.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
log { on | off }  
Parameters  
on  
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages on.  
off  
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages off.  
Examples  
This example displays the current status of the log message display.  
[296]log  
Display of log messages is currently disabled.  
[296]  
This example displays the activation of the log message display.  
[296]log on  
Display of log messages is now enabled.  
[296]  
This example displays the deactivation of log message display.  
[296] log off  
Display of log messages is now disabled.  
[296]  
9-64  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: logout  
logout  
Description  
This command closes a shell session.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
logout  
Examples  
This example displays the closing of a shell session.  
[296]logout  
Writing Configuration ...  
Goodbye.  
** Disconnecting **  
9-65  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: ls  
ls  
Description  
This command displays a list of available files.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ls [ -l ]  
Parameters  
-l  
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,  
time, date, and size.  
Note: Entering lswith this option is the same as entering dir.  
Examples  
This example displays all available files.  
[296]ls  
boot.ini  
boot.img  
log.txt  
core.txt  
primary.cnf  
[296]  
This example displays all available files with associated permission levels, times,  
dates, and sizes.  
[296]ls -l  
-rw-r--r--  
-r--r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
[296]  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
0
0
0
0
0
143 Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini  
2175720 Aug 15 10:05 boot.img  
22061 Jun 1 00:00 log.txt  
4342 Aug 15 08:21 core.txt  
7092 Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf  
9-66  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: menu  
menu  
Description  
This command accesses the AI296 main menu system.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
menu  
Examples  
This example displays the AI296 Main Menu.  
AI296 Main Menu  
+ Link Menu  
+ System Menu  
+ IP Over X.25 Subnet Menu  
+ Static Route Menu  
....................................................................  
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :  
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.  
:..................................................................:  
:
<F1> Help  
<F4> Close  
CAUTION: The following message appears in the shell when the user exits the main  
menu and has the last login port disabled:  
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take  
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.  
This message is only seen when the system is running in standalone  
mode.  
9-67  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: more  
more  
Description  
This command prints the content of a file to the current shell session one page at a  
time.  
Note: You cannot use this command to view code image files or configuration files  
(.img and .cnf extensions).  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
more filename  
Examples  
This example displays the contents of file log.txt one page at a time.  
[296]more log.txt  
Configuration has changed  
06:20:11 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:20:20 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has entered the shell.  
06:21:01 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:21:07 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has logged out of the Destination Menu.  
04:40:49 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has logged into the Destination Menu.  
04:40:51 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has entered the shell.  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
9-68  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pad  
pad  
Description  
This command calls an X.25 PAD host. It is used with the X.3, X.28 and X.29  
protocols. Used with a link number, it calls the X.25 device connected to that link.  
Without parameters, it enters the command mode.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
pad  
Note: There are several parameters available with this command. See the list below.  
Parameters  
break  
Sends a break signal to host.  
breakaction  
Sets a breakaction.  
breakin  
Sets a PAD recall character.  
call host  
Sets up a connection to the named host.  
clear  
Closes the current connection.  
echo  
Enables/disables terminal echo.  
emask  
Sets the terminal echo mask to n.  
flow  
Enables/disables terminal flow control.  
forward  
Sets data forwarding conditions.  
help  
Displays help information.  
hosts  
Lists all the available hosts.  
int  
Sends an interrupt packet.  
lfinsert  
Sets line feed insertion action.  
loghost  
Displays X.29 messages.  
message  
Enables the message mode of operation.  
native  
Enables the native mode of operation.  
9-69  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pad  
pagewait  
Sets page wait to nlines.  
param  
par  
Displays current X.3 parameters.  
Displays specified X.3 parameters.  
Defines terminal as the hardcopy device.  
Sets the terminal profile.  
printer  
profile  
quit  
Exits the PAD session.  
reset  
rpar?  
rset?  
set  
Resets the current call.  
Displays specified remote X.3 parameters.  
Sets and displays specified remote X.3 parameters.  
Sets specified X.3 parameters.  
set?  
Sets and displays specified X.3 parameters.  
Lists the status of the connection.  
Enables the transparent mode of operation.  
Defines the terminal as a display device.  
Sets the terminal width to ncharacters.  
status  
transparent  
vdu  
width  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of flow control for PAD.  
[296]pad  
PAD: flow  
Flow = ON  
PAD:  
This example displays the setting of the PAD profile.  
[296]pad  
PAD: profile  
V5  
PAD:  
9-70  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: panic  
panic  
Description  
This command forces AI296 to crash dump and halt.  
Command Type  
winslc  
Formats  
winslc baseport panic  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the AI296 baseport number.  
9-71  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: passwd  
passwd  
Description  
This command changes an existing user’s password.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
passwd  
Note: After the initial command is entered, AI296 prompts the user for  
information needed to configure the new password.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of a new password for existing user pubs.  
[296]passwd  
Please enter the login name of the user  
whose password is being changed.  
pubs  
Please enter the OLD password for user 'pubs'.  
Please enter the NEW password.  
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.  
Please retype NEW password.  
Password successfully changed.  
[296]  
9-72  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: ping  
ping  
Description  
This command sends an ICMP echo request to the specified IP address. If the IP  
device responds to the echo request, a reply receipt message appears. If a reply is  
not received within 5 seconds, a no reply message appears. This command can be  
used to troubleshoot network level problems.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
ping ip_address  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport ping ip_address  
Parameters  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal  
format.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Examples  
This example displays what happens when host 172.16.30.110 replies to a ping.  
[296] ping 172.16.30.110  
Pinging host 172.16.30.110  
ICMP Echo Reply:TTL 60  
Host 172.16.30.110 replied to the ping  
The TTL (time-to-live) is the number of jumps or hops the message is allowed to take.  
This example displays what happens when no reply is received from host  
172.16.30.114.  
[296] ping 172.16.30.114  
Pinging host 172.16.30.114  
Host 172.16.30.114 didn't reply to the ping  
9-73  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pppstatus  
pppstatus  
Description  
This command displays the status of all ModMux and asynchronous PPP-IPCP links.  
If IPCP is running on the link (the link status is RUNNING), this command also displays  
the local and remote IP addresses.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
pppstatus  
Examples  
This example displays the status of all PPP-IPCP links.  
[296] pppstatus  
Link Phase  
1: ESTABLISH  
14: SERIALCONN  
[296]  
Local IP Addr. Remote IP Addr.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Column  
Link  
Description  
Displays the link number.  
Phase  
Displays the status of the link. Values are:  
z INITIALIZE—Indicates the link is down.  
z SERIALCONN—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
link is waiting for the data carrier detect (DCD) signal or the  
data set ready (DSR) signal to come up.  
z ESTABLISH—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
AI296 and the remote device are negotiating basic  
information on how the connection will operate.  
z AUTHENTICATE—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
link is validating ID and password information with the remote  
device.  
z NETWORK—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The link  
is negotiating the local and remote IP addresses.  
z RUNNING—Indicates the link is up and connected. IPCP is  
running on the link. The AI296 and the remote device can  
transfer IP packets over the link.  
9-74  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pppstatus  
Column  
Description  
Local IP Addr.  
Displays one of the following:  
The IP address of AI296 (if the link status is RUNNING)  
z
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,  
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)  
Remote IP Addr.  
Displays one of the following:  
z
The IP address of the remote device (if the link status is  
RUNNING)  
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,  
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)  
9-75  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: profile  
profile  
Description  
This command allows a user account profile to be customized. The following six  
system profiles are maintained:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Supervisor  
Management  
Status  
Empty  
Destination menu  
Connect  
Profile names are limited to 19 characters. Only 20 user configurable profiles are  
allowed to be configured at the same time.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
profile  
-n  
-l profile_name  
-c existing_profile new_profile  
-a profile_name [ commands [ -w ] ] ...  
-d profile_name [ commands ] ...  
-remove [ profile_name ]  
Parameters  
-a  
Adds commands to a profile and optionally adds write permission. The  
following parameters are accepted:  
z profile_name—Defines the name of a user profile.  
z command—Defines the name of a command to associate with a user  
profile.  
z -w—Adds write permission for a command that otherwise would not  
have write permission.  
9-76  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: profile  
-c  
Creates a new profile from an existing user profile. The following  
parameters are accepted:  
z existing_profile—Specifies the name of an existing user profile.  
z new_profile—Defines the name of a new user profile.  
-d  
Deletes commands from a profile. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z profile_name—Defines the name of a user profile.  
z command—Defines the name of a command to associate with a user  
profile.  
-l  
Lists all commands associated with a specific user profile. The following  
parameter is accepted:  
profile_name—Defines the name of a user profile.  
-n  
Lists all user profile names.  
-remove  
Removes a user profile. The following parameter is accepted:  
profile_name—Defines the name of a user profile.  
Examples  
This example displays each of the profile parameter options with associated  
functionality.  
[296]profile  
Usage: profile -n  
to list profile names  
: profile -l <profile name>  
to list all commands associated with a given profile  
: profile -c <existing profile name> <new profile name>  
to create a new profile from an existing profile  
: profile -a <profile name> [commands [-w]]...  
to add commands to a profile and possibly add write permission  
: profile -d <profile name> [commands]...  
to delete commands from a profile  
: profile -remove <profile name>  
to completely remove a profile  
[296]  
9-77  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pvcedit  
pvcedit  
Description  
This command allows a change to occur on a PVC without bringing down (bouncing)  
the entire link. This command can also be used to reset the PVC without resetting the  
entire link. If no options are specified, the PVC is simply reset. This command also  
has the following constraints:  
z
z
z
Only asynchronous and X.25 PVCs are to be used.  
Asynchronous PVCs can be reset only.  
X.25 PVCs can be reset and altered.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the AI296 system command:  
pvcedit  
asy.link_number.lcn [ -a call_timer | -c inactivity_timer | -p ]  
x25.link_number.lcn [ -a call_timer | -c inactivity_timer | -p ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport pvcedit  
asy.link_number.lcn [ -a call_timer | -c inactivity_timer | -p ]  
x25.link_number.lcn [ -a call_timer | -c inactivity_timer | -p ]  
Parameters  
-a  
Forces the PVC to activate with the corresponding call  
timer.  
asy.link_number.lcn  
Defines the link number and logical channel number for  
the asynchronous PVC being edited.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
-c  
Forces the PVC to connect on activity with the  
corresponding inactivity timer.  
call_timer  
Defines the value of the call timer. Valid values are from  
30 to 600.  
inactivity_timer  
Defines the value for the inactivity timer. Valid values are  
from 1 to 600.  
9-78  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pvcedit  
-p  
Forces the PVC to become passive.  
x25.link_number.lcn  
Defines the link number and logical channel number for  
the X.25 PVC being edited.  
Examples  
This example displays the call timer set to 32 seconds for PVC x25.4.3.  
[296]pvcedit x25.4.3 -a 32  
[296]  
9-79  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pvclist  
pvclist  
Description  
This command lists the PVCs in the system and displays their current state. If there  
are many PVCs in the system, this command redirects its output to a file named  
pvc.lst for easier viewing.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
pvclist [ link_range | * ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport pvclist [ link_range ]  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Examples  
This example displays PVC information for link 1.  
[296]pvclist 1  
[PVC list]  
+asy.1.1  
[296]  
it=0  
ASD: state=idle  
muxid=0  
fd=65  
flags=00a0  
Column  
First column  
Description  
Displays the PVC protocol type, link number, and LCN (logical  
channel number).  
9-80  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: pvclist  
Column  
Description  
Second column Displays the timer type for the PVC. Possible values are:  
z ct—Displays the connect timer if the PVC is active. The  
number indicates the timer setting in seconds.  
z it—Displays the inactivity timer if the PVC is a connect-on-  
activity PVC. The number indicates the timer setting in  
seconds.  
z Passive—Appears if the PVC is a passive type of PVC.  
Third column  
Defines the state of the PVC. Possible values are:  
z idle—Indicates the PVC is ready to connect.  
z dataxfer—Indicates the PVC is connected and able to pass  
data.  
z incon—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
z attaching—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
z not attached—Indicates that the PVC is not connected.  
z detached—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
If the display indicates one of the transition states, this should  
only appear for a short period of time. If the state remains in this  
condition, contact Technical Support.  
Fourth column  
Fifth column  
Sixth column  
Defines the MuxID, which is an internal number used by  
developers to describe which data stream is used for the  
connection.  
Defines the file descriptor, which is an integer value used by  
developers to describe which data stream is used for the  
connection.  
Defines the flag, which gives a code that indicates the purpose of  
the data stream.  
9-81  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: reset  
reset  
Description  
This command resets AI296.  
CAUTION: All call processing will stop and all connections will be lost during the  
reboot process.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
reset  
Examples  
This example displays the resetting of AI296.  
[296] reset  
Are you SURE you want to reset the system? (y/n) y  
Resetting system ...  
9-82  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: rz  
rz  
Description  
This command allows AI296 to receive files from a PC using the Zmodem file transfer  
protocol. This command can be executed from any asynchronous port or Telnet  
connection.  
Note: After issuing the rzcommand, if the sending PC does not begin the file  
transfer within 40 seconds, the system returns to the prompt.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
rz  
Examples  
This example displays AI296 receiving two files from a PC.  
[296] rz  
Ready to receive. Start your upload now.  
**B01000400654a92  
2 files received.  
[296]  
9-83  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: selcnf  
selcnf  
Note: This command is only available for AI296 in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command has two forms: One allows for the recovery of an overwritten runtime  
configuration file and the other allows for the deletion of the specified configuration  
file. Any configuration file (with a .cnf extension) can be used for system boot up. The  
configuration file is written to boot.ini.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
selcnf  
-r  
-d config_file  
Parameters  
-r  
Specifies the option that recovers the current overwritten run-time  
configuration file.  
-d  
Specifies the option that deletes a configuration file. The following parameter is  
accepted:  
config_file—Defines a configuration file for deletion; it must end with a  
.cnf extension.  
Examples  
This example displays the available options for command selcnf.  
[296]selcnf  
usage: selcnf -r  
selcnf [-d] <config_file>  
Selects the specified config file for current configuration.  
Options:  
-r  
-d  
Recovers the current over-written run-time config file  
Deletes the specified configuration file  
[296]  
9-84  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: sholog  
sholog  
Description  
This command displays the contents of the log file. The last 32,000 characters of log  
messages that were sent to the log port are displayed.  
Note: This command has the same functionality as command show log.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
sholog -p  
Parameters  
-p  
Displays the content of the file one page at a time.  
Note: This option is not available with command show log.  
Examples  
This example displays the contents of an AI296 log file one page at a time.  
[296]sholog -p  
Configuration has changed  
06:20:11 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:20:20 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has entered the shell.  
06:21:01 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:21:07 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has logged out of the Destination Menu.  
04:40:49 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has logged into the Destination Menu.  
04:40:51 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has entered the shell.  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
9-85  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: show  
show  
Description  
This command displays various types of information for AI296.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
show  
comments  
conn  
crash  
data [ link_range | * ]  
eth  
inventory  
ip  
log  
mem  
perf [ link_range | * ]  
ports [ link_range | * ]  
pvc  
router  
tconn  
tcp  
version  
wan  
For winslc, enter the following command with any of the shell command keywords:  
winslc baseport show  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
comments  
Displays comments.  
conn  
Displays all active connections.  
crash  
Displays crash dump information.  
9-86  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: show  
data  
Displays link data. The following parameters are accepted:  
z link_range—Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to  
32. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-  
). For example, 1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
z *—Specifies all links.  
Displays the date and time.  
Displays Ethernet information.  
date  
eth  
inventory  
Displays the serial number, product name, manufacture date, and  
MAC address (when in standalone mode).  
ip  
Displays the IP address, subnet mask, and high IP address.  
Displays the contents of the log file, same as command sholog.  
Displays memory allocation.  
log  
mem  
perf  
Displays serial link performance. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z link_range—Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to  
32. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-  
). For example, 1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
z *—Specifies all links.  
ports  
Displays the link number, link type, and description for all available  
ports or for a specified range of ports. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z link_range—Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to  
32. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-  
). For example, 1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
z *—Specifies all links.  
pvc  
Displays PVC connections.  
router  
tconn  
tcp  
Displays the default and backup gateway IP address.  
Displays complete connections.  
Displays TCP information, such as maximum keepalive tries, dropped  
SNMP requests, and total opened sockets.  
version  
wan  
Displays the version number of AI296.  
Displays WAN diagnostic information.  
9-87  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: show  
Examples  
This example displays the AI296 version number.  
[296]show version  
Version 96HPC961.000003 created on 2004-07-06 at 09:31:34  
Boot Loader Version 96B2L103.000003  
[296]  
This example displays the serial link performance for links 2-5.  
[296]show perf 2-5  
Performance for last 60 seconds:  
Intrf Type Input Chars/sec  
Output Chars/sec  
2
X.25  
X.25  
X.25  
X.25  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
5
[296]  
This example displays the link numbers, link types, and descriptions for ports 13-16.  
[296]show ports 13-16  
Link Type Description  
13: X25  
14: X25  
15: X25  
16: X25  
[296]  
9-88  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: staeia  
staeia  
Description  
This command displays the status of the EIA leads.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
staeia { link_range | * }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport staeia { link_range | * }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport of AI296.  
Examples  
This example displays the status of the EIA leads for links 1 to 5.  
[296]staeia 1-5  
Link Type Status  
IN  
DCD CTS  
OUT  
DTR RTS  
1: ASY Enabled  
2: X25 Enabled  
3: X25 Enabled  
4: X25 Enabled  
5: X25 Disabled  
[296]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Column Description  
DCD  
DCD is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
9-89  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: staeia  
Column Description  
CTS  
DTR  
RTS  
CTS is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
DTR is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
RTS is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
9-90  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: standalone  
standalone  
Description  
This command enables or disables standalone mode. For more information about the  
difference between standalone mode and switch mode, refer to Appendix B:  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
standalone { true | false }  
Parameters  
true  
Puts AI296 in standalone mode.  
false  
Takes AI296 out of standalone mode.  
Examples  
This example displays the current standalone mode status.  
[296]standalone  
Currently forced standalone mode is OFF.  
Currently running in switch mode.  
[296]  
This example displays the configuration of standalone mode for AI296.  
[296]standalone true  
[296]  
9-91  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: staslc  
staslc  
Description  
This command displays the status of the links and the DP232 cable.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
staslc { link_range | * }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport staslc { link_range | * }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
9-92  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: staslc  
Examples  
This example displays the link and cable status information for links 1 to 5.  
[296]staslc 1-5  
Link  
Current status  
1: +Asy Link n,8,1  
Speed Act Pmax Rx/CRC Rx/Abt Rx/Ovr Tx/Und Intf  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 RS-232  
0 RS-232  
0 RS-232  
0 RS-232  
2: +DCE -Dcd -Frm -Pkt  
3: +DCE -Dcd -Frm -Pkt  
4: +DCE -Dcd -Frm -Pkt  
0
0
0
128  
128  
128  
5: -DCE -Dcd -Frm -Pkt  
9600  
0
128  
0
0
0
0 RS-232  
[296]  
Note: Not all links are displayed here. Entering the command with no additional  
parameters would show all 16 links.  
Column  
Link  
Description  
Displays the number of the link.  
Status  
Displays the link status as dataxfer (data is being transfered),  
idle, or disabled.  
Appl.  
Displays the application specified for the link (Alias, Login, or  
Destination).  
DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD  
Displays the status of the control signals. (+ means the signal  
is asserted and - means the signal is negated.)  
Format  
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity (none, odd,  
or even), and number of stop bits specified for the link.  
Parity  
Frame  
Displays the number of parity errors.  
Displays the number of framing errors.  
Displays the number of overrun errors.  
Displays the number of underrun errors.  
Overun  
Underun  
9-93  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: syncflash  
syncflash  
Note: This command is only available when AI296 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command synchronizes the AI296 configuration with the configuration  
information stored on AI198. Enabling this feature ensures that if AI296 is placed in  
standalone mode, it will operate as it did in switch mode.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
syncflash { true | false }  
Parameters  
true  
Enables the update configuration functionality.  
false  
Disables the update configuration functionality.  
Note: When running in standalone mode, AI296 always writes to its file system when  
configuration changes are made. When running in switch mode, the running  
configuration on AI296 is always kept current with AI198's configuration.  
Examples  
This example displays the AI296 configuration being synchronized with the  
configuration information stored on AI198.  
[296]syncflash true  
[296]  
9-94  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: sz  
sz  
Description  
This command sends files from AI296 to a receiving PC using the Zmodem file  
transfer protocol. This command can be executed from any asynchronous port or  
Telnet connection.  
Note: Before attempting to send files, AI296 sends a signal to the receiving PC. If  
your emulation program does not support this feature, you may have to start  
the receiving PC manually.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
sz [ filename ] ...  
Parameters  
filename  
Specifies the file to send from AI296 to the receiving PC.  
Examples  
This example displays file userlog.txt being sent from AI296 to the receiving PC.  
[296] sz userlog.txt  
Sending files.  
**O  
1 file sent.  
[296]  
9-95  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs  
tacacs  
Description  
This command displays TACACS+ log and shell session information.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs  
info  
sholog [ -p ]  
stats [ clear ]  
Parameters  
info  
Specifies how the current shell session was authenticated. If the  
current session was authenticated by a TACACS+ server, it will display  
the IP address of the server. If a TACACS+ server could not be  
contacted and fallback is enabled, it will display Fallback to local. If  
TACACS+ authentication was disabled, it will display Local.  
sholog  
Displays the contents of the TACACS+ debug log file. The TACACS+  
debug log file records all connection attempts to TACACS+ servers.  
The following information is displayed for each connection attempt:  
z
z
z
z
A record of the timestamp  
The IP address of TACACS+ server  
The AAA phase  
The success or failure status associated with each connection.  
Note: The TACACS+ debug log file is only populated when TACACS+  
debugging is enabled using command debug tacacs on.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
-p—Paginates the sholog output.  
stats  
Displays or clears TACACS+ specific counters and statistics. The  
following parameters are accepted:  
clear—Clears the counters and statistics.  
9-96  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs  
Examples  
This example displays the TACACS+ authentication method for this shell connection  
as Local.  
[296] tacacs info  
Current session authenticated by: Local  
[296]  
This example displays a TACACS+ debug log file.  
[296] tacacs sholog  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.074 AUTHEN FAIL  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.089 AUTHEN SUCCESS  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.074 AUTHOR FAIL  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.089 AUTHOR SUCCESS  
This example displays all TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.  
[296] tacacs stats  
TACACS+ Statistics  
-------------------------  
Connect Attempts:  
Connect Failures:  
0
0
Wrong Header Type:  
0
0
0
0
Wrong Header Sequence Number:  
Wrong Header Session ID:  
Wrong Body Length:  
Write Errors:  
Read Errors:  
0
0
0
0
Short Header Received:  
Short Body Received:  
Timed-out waiting for response: 0  
[296]  
Display Item  
Description  
Connect Attempts  
Connect Failures  
Wrong Header Type  
Displays the number of attempts that were made to connect to  
the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of failed connection attempts that were  
made to the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had an invalid type.  
Wrong Header  
Sequence Number  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had a sequence number that was out of order.  
9-97  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs  
Display Item  
Description (Continued)  
Wrong Header  
Session ID  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had an invalid session ID.  
Wrong Body Length  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had a body length attribute that did not match the  
actual length of body received.  
Write Errors  
Read Errors  
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI296  
attempted to send a packet to the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI296  
attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+ server.  
Short Header  
Received  
Displays the number of incomplete headers that were received  
when AI296 attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+  
server.  
Short Body  
Received  
Displays the number of packets with incomplete bodies that  
were received when AI296 attempted to read them from the  
TACACS+ server.  
Timed-out waiting  
for response  
Displays the number of times AI296 timed out while waiting for  
a response from the TACACS+ server. For information about  
configuring the time out value, refer to command aaa on page  
9-6.  
9-98  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs server  
tacacs server  
Description  
This command enables, disables, or removes the configuration for specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
config tacacs server  
{ server_range | * } { disable | enable | default }  
ip { server_range | * } { ip_address }  
phase { server_range | * } { disable | enable }  
{ account | all | authen | author }  
port { server_range | * } { port_number }  
secret { server_range | * } { shared_secret }  
summary [ server_range | * ]  
Parameters  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
default  
Disables all servers in the range and sets all configuration values  
to their defaults.  
disable  
Disables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.  
enable  
Enables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.  
ip  
Configures an IP address for specified TACACS+ servers.  
Note: AI296 does not prevent users from configuring multiple  
server entries with the same IP address.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
z server_range—Specifies a server number or range of server  
numbers.  
z ip_address—Defines the server IP address.  
9-99  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs server  
phase  
Configures the AAA phases that are allowed for specified  
TACACS+ servers. The following parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
z account—Enables or disables the accounting phase for the  
specified TACACS+ servers.  
z all—Enables or disables all AAA phases for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
z authen—Enables or disables the authentication phase for the  
specified TACACS+ servers.  
z author—Enables or disables the authorization phase for the  
specified TACACS+ servers.  
z disable—Disables the specified AAA phases for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
z enable—Enables the specified AAA phases for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
z server_range—Specifies a server number or range of server  
numbers.  
port  
Configures the TCP port number for specified TACACS+ servers.  
The following parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
z port_number—Defines the TCP port number for the TACACS+  
servers. Valid values are 1 through 65535.  
z server_range—Specifies a server number or range of server  
numbers.  
secret  
Configures the TACACS+ shared secret, which is similar to a  
password, for specified TACACS+ servers. The following  
parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
z shared_secret—Defines the TACACS+ shared secret for the  
server or server range. The maximum length of the shared  
secret is 24 characters.  
z server_range—Specifies a server number or range of server  
numbers.  
summary  
Displays a summary of TACACS+ server configuration settings for  
specified servers. The following parameters are accepted:  
z *—Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
z server_range—Specifies a server number or range of server  
numbers.  
9-100  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs server  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. The server  
number represents a server’s priority level. AI296 attempts to  
contact all servers in the range starting with the lowest numbered  
ones. If the connection to server #1 fails, AI296 will attempt to  
contact server #2, and so on. Valid values are 1 to 9. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For  
example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
Command Defaults  
Disabled  
Examples  
The following TACACS+ server settings are configured for server numbers 1, 4, and 7:  
z
z
z
z
z
Enabled TACACS+ servers  
IP address 12.56.120.4  
Disabled accounting phase  
Port number 32500  
Secret newguy.  
[296] tacacs server 1,4,7 enable  
[296] tacacs server ip 3 12.56.120.4  
[296] tacacs server phase 1-5,8 disable account  
[296] tacacs server port 7-9 32500  
[296] tacacs server secret 8 newguy  
This example displays all configured TACACS+ servers and server settings.  
[296] tacacs server summary  
Server IP Address  
Port Secret  
------ --------------- ----- ------------------------ ---------------------  
Phases  
+ 1  
- 2  
- 3  
+ 4  
- 5  
- 6  
+ 7  
- 8  
- 9  
000.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
012.056.120.004  
012.012.012.012  
012.012.012.012  
012.012.012.012  
49  
49  
49  
49  
49  
49  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author Account  
Authen Author Account  
000.000.000.000 32500  
000.000.000.000 32500  
000.000.000.000 32500  
newguy Authen Author  
Authen Author Account  
[296]  
Display Item Description  
Server  
Displays the server numbers. The +/- signs indicate if the  
associated servers are enabled (+) or disabled (-).  
9-101  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tacacs server  
Display Item Description (Continued)  
IP Address  
Displays the configured TACACS+ IP addresses for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Port  
Displays the configured TACACS+ port numbers for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Secret  
Phases  
Displays the TACACS+ shared secrets (passwords) for specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Displays the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS+  
servers.  
9-102  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tail  
tail  
Description  
This command displays the last few lines of a file.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tail [ -n lines ] file_name ...  
Note: More than one file name can be specified in this command.  
Parameters  
-n  
Specifies that a line number value will be entered.  
lines  
Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.  
file_name  
Defines the name of the file to display.  
Examples  
This example displays the last 10 lines of file userlog.txt.  
[296]tail -n 10 userlog.txt  
[14:09:46 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1309 has exited the shell.  
[14:14:50 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1309 has entered the shell.  
[16:17:53 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1309 has exited the shell.  
[16:17:53 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1309 has logged out of the Destinat  
ion Menu.  
[16:27:23 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1565 has logged into the Destinatio  
n Menu.  
[16:27:25 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1565 has entered the shell.  
[17:44:07 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1565 has exited the shell.  
[17:44:18 072204] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1565 has logged out of the Destinat  
ion Menu.  
[09:15:28 072304] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1205 has logged into the Destinatio  
n Menu.  
[09:15:29 072304] User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1205 has entered the shell.  
[296]  
9-103  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tcpoutconn  
tcpoutconn  
Description  
This command controls how long outgoing TCP connections wait for a connection to  
be established before failing.  
Command Type  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
tcpoutconn [ timeout ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport tcpoutconn [ timeout ]  
Parameters  
timeout  
Defines the length of the timeout. The range is 2 to 360 seconds. The  
default is 75.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Note: In standalone mode, resetting AI296 resets the timeout to the default of 75.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of the TCP outgoing connection timer to 30  
seconds.  
[296]tcpoutconn 30  
TCP Outgoing Connection Timer Value: 30  
[296]  
9-104  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tftp  
tftp  
Note: This command is only available when AI296 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command downloads a file from the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server  
to AI296 or uploads a file to the TFTP server from AI296.  
The following rules apply when uploading or downloading a file:  
z
z
File names must contain an extension of .ini, .img, .zmg, .cnf, or .txt.  
Configuration files can be downloaded directly to file primary.cnf or to another .cnf  
file.  
z
z
z
The only .txt file allowed is banner.txt and the only .ini file allowed is boot.ini.  
AI296 must be updated in order to run a downloaded image file.  
Any .img filename is acceptable except boot.img, which is reserved, and  
primary_devel.img, which is the primary image.  
z
z
All .zmg files must be written to a destination file with a .img extension. If no  
destination file name is given, the name will default to the source file name with a  
.img extension.  
The source and destination file names must have the same extension (excluding  
.zmg files, which use a .img extension).  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tftp  
get [ address ] [ source_filename ] [ dest_filename ]  
put [ address ] [ source_filename ] [ dest_filename ]  
9-105  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tftp  
Parameters  
get  
Downloads a file from the TFTP server. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z address—Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file  
download will occur.  
z source_filename—Defines the file to download from the TFTP server.  
Note: The source file name cannot contain spaces or special  
characters.  
z dest_filename—Defines the name of the source file after it has been  
downloaded from the server. If no destination file name is specified, the  
file will have the same name as the source file.  
Note: The destination file name cannot contain spaces or special  
characters.  
put  
Uploads a file to the TFTP server. The following parameters are accepted:  
z address—Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file  
upload will occur.  
z source_filename—Defines the file to upload to the TFTP server.  
Note: The source file name cannot contain spaces or special  
characters.  
z dest_filename—Defines the name of the source file after it has been  
uploaded to the server. If no destination file name is specified, the file will  
have the same name as the source file.  
Note: The destination file name cannot contain spaces or special  
characters.  
Examples  
This example displays the upload of file primary.cnf to file secondary.cnf on TFTP  
server 10.34.6.13.  
[296] tftp put 10.34.6.13 primary.cnf secondary.cnf  
File Uploaded successfully.  
[296]  
9-106  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tftp  
This example displays the download of file secondary.cnf to file primary.cnf from TFTP  
server 10.34.6.13.  
[296] tftp get 10.34.6.13 secondary.cnf primary.cnf  
Attempting to Download the file secondary.cnf ...  
File Downloaded successfully.  
[296]  
9-107  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tftpboot  
tftpboot  
Description  
This command displays the BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts attempts to contact the  
BOOTP server. The AI296 card attempts to contact a BOOTP server if certain  
conditions are met. These conditions are:  
z
The card is in standalone mode.  
AND  
z
The card does not have an IP address set or no BOOT.INI file exists.  
Attempts to contact the BOOTP server continue until a valid reply is received or until  
the IP address gets set by the user in another manner, such as with an “ip init” shell  
command.  
Note: If the conditions are initially met, then the card will not attempt to contact the  
BOOTP server.  
When AI296 receives the necessary information from the BOOTP server, it attempts  
to retrieve a configuration file from the TFTP server. The TFTP server information is  
contained in the response from the BOOTP server.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tftpboot  
Examples  
This example displays the result of a card booting without a BOOTP/TFTP session.  
[296]tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
BOOTP/TFTP did not run this session.  
[296]  
9-108  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: tftpboot  
This example displays the result of a card booting when no BOOTP or TFTP server is  
on the net.  
[296] tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
Waiting for a response from the BOOTP server.  
[296] tftpboot abort  
BOOTP/TFTP retry attempts will be aborted.  
[296]  
This example displays the result of a boot when the BOOTP server is on the net but  
the TFTP server is not available:  
[296] tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
Waiting for a response from the TFTP server.  
BOOTP Response:  
IP Address: 10.48.60.11  
TFTP Server: 10.48.60.1  
TFTP File: 296v950b002.cnf  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Router: 10.48.0.1  
[296]  
This example displays the result of a reboot with a successful BOOTP/TFTP session:  
[296]tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
BOOTP/TFTP is finished.  
[296]  
9-109  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: timezone  
timezone  
Note: This command is only available when AI296 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command displays or changes the time zone or adjusts the time to reflect  
daylight savings.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
timezone  
-dstoff [ { + | - } hh:mm ]  
-dston [ { + | - } hh:mm ]  
Parameters  
-dston  
Enables daylight savings time for AI296. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z
+—Specifies that the value is east of UTC.  
-—Specifies that the value is west of UTC.  
z
z hh—Defines the number of hours from UTC (Universal Coordinated  
Time or Greenwich Mean Time).  
z mm—Defines the number of minutes from UTC (Universal  
Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time).  
-dstoff  
Disables daylight savings time for AI296. The following parameters are  
accepted:  
z
+—Specifies that the value is east of UTC.  
-—Specifies that the value is west of UTC.  
z
z hh—Defines the number of hours from UTC (Universal Coordinated  
Time or Greenwich Mean Time).  
z mm—Defines the number of minutes from UTC (Universal  
Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time).  
Note: For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time  
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.  
The time entered here is the number of hours from UTC. For example, if the  
desired location is in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, enter -05:00 in  
this field. This indicates a time 5 hours behind UTC.  
9-110  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: timezone  
Examples  
This example displays the current daylight savings time setting.  
[296]timezone  
Daylight saving is disabled on this system  
Current time zone: +00:00  
[296]  
This example displays the enabling of daylight savings time and the setting of the  
timezone to -5:00.  
[296]timezone -dston  
Daylight saving is enabled on this system  
Current time zone: +00:00  
[296]timezone -05:30  
Daylight saving is enabled on this system  
Current time zone: -05:30  
[296]  
9-111  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: trace  
trace  
Description  
This command configures which X.25 rejected call codes (cause and diagnostic)  
appear on the log port. This command can also be used to see the current trace level.  
The default trace level is 3.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the AI296 system command:  
trace level  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport trace level  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
level  
Defines the minimum trace level on the log port. For example, if level  
is set to 2, all X.25 events assigned a priority of 2 or higher will appear  
on the log port. The valid range for this argument is 1 to 5. The default  
level is 3.  
Note: If you enter this command without a level, the current trace level number  
appears.  
Table 9-3 shows the priority assigned to each trace level.  
Table 9-3 Trace Priority Levels  
Priority  
Level  
X25_TRACE  
X25_NORMAL  
X25_MINOR  
X25_MAJOR  
X25_FATAL  
1
2
3 (default)  
4
5
9-112  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: trace  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of trace 2.  
[296]trace 2  
X.25 Trace Level: 2  
[296]  
9-113  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: traceroute  
traceroute  
Description  
This command diagnoses connectivity problems between AI296 and other hosts.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
traceroute ip_address  
Parameters  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal  
format.  
Examples  
This example displays the traceroute to IP address 10.40.57.10.  
[296]traceroute 10.40.57.10  
traceroute to 10.40.57.10, 10.40.57.10, 30 hops max, 40 byte packets  
1 10.40.57.10  
[296]  
9-114  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: type  
type  
Description  
This command displays the text of any file other than a code image or configuration  
file.  
Note: This command has the same functionality as command cat.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
type [ -p ] filename  
Parameters  
-p  
Displays text from the file one page at a time.  
filename  
Defines the file for which you want to view the contents.  
Examples  
This example displays the first page of contents for file log.txt.  
[296]type -p log.txt  
Configuration has changed  
06:20:11 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:20:20 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has entered the shell.  
06:21:01 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
06:21:04 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has exited the shell.  
06:21:07 060600 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1436 has logged out of the Destination Menu.  
04:40:49 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has logged into the Destination Menu.  
04:40:51 060700 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2729 has entered the shell.  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
9-115  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: update  
update  
Description  
This command displays information about the image and configuration files. When  
entered with arguments, this command updates AI296 software. Update the software  
by copying a new image or configuration file to a destination file.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
update src_file dest_file  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport update src_file dest_file  
Parameters  
src_file  
Defines the source file to copy.  
dest_file  
Defines the file where the source file is to be stored.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
Note: The src_fileand the dest_filemust both have a file extension of either .cnf  
or .img.  
Examples  
This example displays the update of source image file 296.imgto destination image file  
boot.img.  
[296]update 296.img boot.img  
[296]  
9-116  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: uptime  
uptime  
Description  
This command displays the current time and the amount of time AI296 has been  
running since it was last booted.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
uptime  
Examples  
This example displays the current time and the amount of time AI296 has been  
running since it was last booted.  
[296]uptime  
1:33pm up 2 days, 23:08:40  
(uptime rolls over every 497 days, 2:27:52)  
[296]  
9-117  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: useradd  
useradd  
Description  
This command adds a username and password. When the user first logs into AI296,  
the login name and password are both aiby default. Five grace logins are available  
before a username and password must be configured. A total of ten users can be  
added to the database.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
useradd [ -profile_name ] [ username ]  
Parameters  
profile_name  
Assigns a permission to a username. Table 9-4 describes the  
permissions. The default permission is supervisor.  
username  
Defines the login name for a user (up to 8 characters). After  
entering a username, a prompt appears that asks for a password  
(up to 10 characters).  
Table 9-4 Description of Permissions  
profile_name Permission  
supervisor  
Specifies a user who can execute all commands on the system. At  
least one supervisor permission must be configured. The system  
will not allow the deletion of the only supervisor user. The default  
permission is supervisor.  
mgmt  
Specifies a user who can execute all commands except for  
useradd.  
9-118  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: useradd  
Table 9-4 Description of Permissions (Continued)  
profile_name Permission  
status  
Specifies a user who can only execute the following commands:  
z creset  
z debug  
z diag-conn  
z diag-info  
z diag-eth  
z diag-tconn  
z help  
z ip  
z menu  
z ping  
z pvclist  
z show  
z staeia  
z staslc  
dest  
Specifies a user who can login into AI296 and access the  
destination menu. The user cannot connect to destination aito  
retrieve status or to change the configuration.  
connect  
Specifies a user who is automatically connected to a specific  
destination at login. The destination is specified when the  
permission is assigned.  
Examples  
This example displays the addition of user brianwith profile mgmtto the user database.  
The system prompts the user for the password after the username and profile are  
entered.  
[296]useradd -mgmt brian  
Adding user of type 'mgmt'  
Please enter a password.  
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.  
Please retype the password.  
User "brian" added successfully.  
[296]  
9-119  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: userdel  
userdel  
Description  
This command deletes a username and password from the database.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
userdel  
Examples  
This example displays the deletion of user brian from the database. After the  
command is initially entered, prompts appear that tell the user what information needs  
to be entered.  
[296]userdel  
Please enter the login name of the user to DELETE.  
brian  
Delete user "brian"? (y/n) y  
User "brian" deleted successfully.  
[296]  
9-120  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: users  
users  
Description  
This command displays currently configured AI296 users with the associated profile  
names and destinations.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
user  
Examples  
This example displays all currently configured AI296 users with associated profile  
names and destinations. In this case, pubs is the only configured user.  
[296] users  
User Name  
-----------------------------------------------  
Profile Name  
Destination  
"pubs"  
[296]  
supervisor  
9-121  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: who  
who  
Description  
This command displays the users currently logged into AI296. It displays the user  
name, time of login, user ID, the source of the connection, and command currently  
being used by each user. The destination is shown only if the user has connected to  
an alias with the destination menu.  
Important: Do not use the ID displayed with this command to break a connection.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
who  
Examples  
This example displays all the users currently logged in to the AI296. In this case, pubs  
is the only logged in user.  
[296]who  
User  
Login Time  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ID From  
Command (-> Destination)  
"pubs"  
[296]  
Jul 23 09:15  
76 10.40.5.20#1205  
who  
9-122  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: xvc  
xvc  
Description  
This command displays information about a specific X.25 logical channel.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the AI296 system command:  
xvc link.circuit  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport xvc link.circuit  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI296.  
link  
Defines a number from 1 to 16.  
circuit  
Defines a valid, logical channel number.  
Examples  
This example displays the X.25 logical channel information for link 3 and circuit 1.  
[296]xvc 3.1  
VC state: DataTransfer, link state: L_connected, restarts 1-1 / 0-0  
NSUat: 1.  
[296]  
9-123  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 Commands: xvc  
9-124  
A
AI296 System Codes  
This appendix provides information about AI296 system codes.  
Guide to this Appendix  
A-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
X.25 cause codes indicate events that triggered X.25 packets. Possible values for the  
cause codes can vary depending on the type of packet (CLEAR REQUEST,  
REGISTRATION CONFIRMATION, RESET REQUEST, or RESTART).  
X.25 diagnostic codes provide additional tips about the nature of a specific problem.  
Unlike cause codes, diagnostic codes do not vary depending on the type of packet.  
Note: Diagnostic codes can be produced by any equipment that handles virtual  
circuits and can propagate through all equipment that handles virtual circuits.  
Because of this, diagnostic codes may not indicate a problem with AI296.  
The following X.25 cause codes and diagnostic codes are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes  
Reset indication cause codes apply to reset packets. Table A-1 lists the standard  
reset indication cause codes (in hexadecimal format) and their meanings.  
Table A-1 Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0x00  
0x01  
0X03  
0X05  
0X07  
0X09  
0X0F  
0X11  
Remote DTE originated reset  
Reset out of order  
Reset due to remote procedure error  
Reset due to local procedure error  
Reset due to network congestion  
Reset due to remote DTE operational  
Reset due to network operational  
Reset due to incompatible destination  
A-2  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-1 Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes (Continued)  
Cause Code Description  
0X1D Reset due to network out of order  
Kentrox-Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes  
Reset indication cause codes apply to reset packets and are specific to Kentrox  
equipment. Table A-2 lists the Kentrox-specific reset indication cause codes (in  
hexadecimal format) and their meanings.  
Table A-2 Kentrox-Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0x9B  
Remote DTE originated reset  
Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes  
Clear indication cause codes apply to clear packets. Table A-3 lists the standard clear  
indication cause codes and their meanings.  
Table A-3 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0x00  
0x01  
0x03  
0x05  
0X09  
0x0B  
0X11  
0x13  
0x15  
0X19  
0X21  
0X29  
DTE originated  
Number busy  
Invalid facility request  
Network congestion  
Clear due to network out of order  
Access barred  
Remote procedure error  
Local procedure error  
Recognized Private Operating Agency (RPOA) out of order  
Reverse charging not subscribed  
Incompatible destination  
Fast select not subscribed  
A-3  
       
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-3 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes (Continued)  
Cause Code Description  
0x39  
0x7F  
Ship absent  
Registration/cancellation confirmed  
Standard ISO Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-3 lists the standard ISO diagnostic codes and their meanings.  
Table A-4 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0xA0  
0xA1  
0xA2  
0xA3  
0xA4  
0xA5  
0xA6  
0xA7  
DTE specific signals  
DTE operational  
DTE not operational  
DTE resource constraint  
Fast select not subscribed  
Invalid partially full data packet  
D-bit procedure not supported  
Registration/cancellation confirmed  
CCITT Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-3 lists the CCITT diagnostic codes and their meanings.  
Table A-5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
No additional information  
Invalid P(S)  
Invalid P(R)  
Packet type invalid  
Packet type invalid for state r1  
Packet type invalid for state r2  
A-4  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes (Continued)  
Cause Code Description  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15  
0x16  
0x17  
0x18  
0x19  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x25  
0x26  
0x27  
0x28  
0x29  
0x2A  
0x2B  
0x2C  
0x2D  
Packet type invalid for state r3  
Packet type invalid for state p1  
Packet type invalid for state p2  
Packet type invalid for state p3  
Packet type invalid for state p4  
Packet type invalid for state p5  
Packet type invalid for state p6  
Packet type invalid for state p7  
Packet type invalid for state d1  
Packet type invalid for state d2  
Packet type invalid for state d3  
Packet type not allowed  
Unidentifiable packet  
Call on one-way logical channel  
Invalid packet type on a permanent virtual circuit  
Packet on unassigned logical channel  
Reject not subscribed to  
Packet too short  
Packet too long  
Invalid general format identifier  
Restart or registration packet with non-zero LCN  
Packet type not compatible with facility  
Unauthorized interrupt confirmation  
Unauthorized interrupt  
Unauthorized reject  
A-5  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
Table A-5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes (Continued)  
Cause Code Description  
0x30  
0x31  
0x32  
0x33  
0x34  
0x40  
0x41  
0x42  
0x43  
0x44  
0x45  
0x46  
0x47  
0x48  
0x49  
0x4A  
0x4B  
0x4C  
0x4D  
0x50  
0x51  
0x52  
0x53  
Timer expired  
Timer expired for incoming call  
Timer expired for clear indication  
Timer expired for reset indication  
Timer expired for restart indication  
Call set up, call clearing, or registration problem  
Facility/registration code not allowed  
Facility parameter not allowed  
Invalid called address  
Invalid calling address  
Invalid facility/registration length  
Incoming call barred  
No logical channel available  
Call collision  
Duplicate facility request  
Non-zero address length  
Non-zero facility length  
Facility not provided when expected  
Invalid CCITT-specified DTE facility  
Miscellaneous  
Improper cause code from DTE  
Not aligned octet  
Inconsistent Q-bit setting  
A-6  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: X.25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes  
Kentrox-Specific Diagnostic Codes  
Kentrox-specific diagnostic codes provide tips about the nature of a specific problem.  
Table A-6 lists the Kentrox-specific diagnostic codes and their meanings.  
Table A-6 Kentrox-specific Diagnostic Codes  
Cause Code Description  
0x85  
0x86  
0x87  
0x88  
0x89  
PVC attach error  
Connection listen error  
Not used  
Internal connection ID not found  
Memory resource error  
A-7  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: Crash Codes  
Crash Codes  
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch  
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious  
hardware or software fault.  
Common Crash Codes  
These codes are common to all software (not just Kentrox products). The first column  
of Table A-7 displays the hexadecimal code for the error message. The second  
column displays the decimal value for the same message. The third column provides  
a description of the error message. Contact Kentrox Technical Support to report any  
of the following crash codes.  
Table A-7 Common Crash Codes  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0009  
09xx  
1
Specifies a bus error.  
2
Specifies an address error.  
Specifies an illegal instruction.  
Specifies a zero divide error.  
Specifies a check instruction trap.  
Specifies a TRAPV error.  
3
4
5
6
7
Specifies a privilege error.  
Specifies a trace trap.  
8
9
Specifies an unused exception vector.  
>264  
Specifies an illegal vector. xx is the vector number  
(non-zero) used in place of the codes above to  
ensure that the exact vector number is determined  
if an exception occurs.  
A-8  
     
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: Crash Codes  
AI296 Crash Codes  
Table A-8 displays crash codes that are specific to AI296. Contact Kentrox Technical  
Support to report any of the following crash codes.  
Table A-8 AI296 Crash Codes  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
0020  
0021  
0022  
0023  
0024  
0025  
0026  
0027  
0028  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Specifies a failure to free resource (streams).  
Specifies a failure to free memory (system).  
Specifies a failure of resource allocation (streams).  
Specifies a failure of memory allocation.  
Specifies a checksum error.  
Specifies that a panic message has been printed.  
Specifies an attempt to boot while up.  
This code is not used.  
Specifies that AI296 has been halted by Central  
Switch command. This code is seen when you enter  
command stpslcfor a card.  
0030  
0031  
0032  
0033  
0034  
0035  
0036  
0037  
0038  
0039  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Specifies a crash in the shell.  
Specifies a crash in transport layer multiplexing.  
Specifies a crash in association daemon.  
Specifies a crash in bootp.  
Specifies a crash in X.25.  
Specifies a crash in an asynchronous driver.  
Specifies a crash in the PVC daemon.  
Specifies a crash in the config daemon.  
Specifies a generic stream error.  
Specifies a crash in the AEP or AEPN protocol  
processing option.  
003A  
58  
Specifies a crash in the pktmod or TL1mod protocol  
processing option.  
A-9  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: Crash Codes  
Table A-8 AI296 Crash Codes (Continued)  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
00AA  
00AC  
00AD  
170  
172  
173  
Specifies a serious memory error (unable to allocate  
system memory).  
Specifies that a serial communication controller is  
not responding.  
Specifies a software download. This is normal to  
see when doing a software update to AI296.  
System Failure Crash Reports  
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch  
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious  
hardware or software fault.  
A message similar to the following appears:  
SLC has CRASHED - registers to follow:  
Crash Code= 000000ad  
PC= 00000000  
SP= 00000000  
IMMR= 00000000  
MSR= 00000000  
GPR00= 00000000  
GPR03= 00000000  
GPR06= 00000000  
GPR09= 00000000  
GPR12= 00000000  
GPR15= 00000000  
GPR18= 00000000  
GPR21= 00000000  
GPR24= 00000000  
GPR27= 00000000  
GPR30= 00000000  
CR= 00000000  
GPR01= 00000000  
GPR04= 00000000  
GPR07= 00000000  
GPR10= 00000000  
GPR13= 00000000  
GPR16= 00000000  
GPR19= 00000000  
GPR22= 00000000  
GPR25= 00000000  
GPR28= 00000000  
GPR31= 00000000  
SSR0= 00000000  
GRP02= 00000000  
GRP05= 00000000  
GRP08= 00000000  
GRP11= 00000000  
GRP14= 00000000  
GRP17= 00000000  
GRP20= 00000000  
GRP23= 00000000  
GRP26= 00000000  
GRP29= 00000000  
SSR1= 00000000  
LR= 00000000  
PVR= 00500000  
XER= 00000000  
PSOS1=00000000  
CTR= 00000000  
PSOS2=00000000  
PSOS3= 00000000  
A-10  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: Kentrox Technical Support  
Kentrox Technical Support  
Some alarm conditions and crash codes reveal serious problems for which you  
should contact Kentrox Technical Support. If one of these alarm conditions or crashes  
should occur, record relevant information associated with the problem and contact  
Kentrox Technical Support.  
Phone:  
Kentrox Technical Support (866) 480-3571  
Kentrox Operator (toll-  
free)  
(800) 247-9482  
Kentrox Operator  
(international)  
(614) 798-2000  
Email:  
Kentrox Technical  
Support  
When you send email to Kentrox, be sure to include your name, company name, and  
telephone number.  
A-11  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
AI296 System Codes: Kentrox Technical Support  
A-12  
B
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode  
This appendix provides information about standalone and switch mode for AI296.  
Guide to this Appendix  
B-1  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode  
Standalone Mode  
Standalone mode refers to the mode where AI296 stores its configuration locally (to  
flash) or on a TFTP server. The CLC might be used as the TFTP server in some  
cases. This lets the card operate as a self-contained unit. When operating in  
standalone mode, AI296 has a local menu system that is used instead of the AI198  
menu system for tasks such as alias and IP configuration. AI296 operates in  
standalone mode when it is installed in the AI110 chassis.  
The following characteristics apply when AI296 is operating in standalone mode:  
z
z
The front panel Ethernet port is the default (rather than the IRB).  
AI296 cards are not hot-swappable—the card configuration must be set up  
manually.  
z
z
AI296 has a unique system OID.  
The AI296 local menu system has slightly different options than when the card is  
running in switch mode.  
Downloading Software for a Standalone AI296  
To download software for AI296 in standalone mode:  
1. Open a command prompt window.  
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:  
ftp  
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI296:  
open ip_address  
ip_address  
Specifies the AI296 IP address.  
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.  
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:  
binary  
5. Transfer the software image to AI296:  
put filepath/imagename.img  
filepath  
Defines the path to the software image file.  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.  
B-2  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode  
6. Exit the FTP utility.  
7. Login to the shell with a serial or Telnet connection.  
8. Update the existing boot program image with the new software image file:  
update imagename.img boot.img  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
9. When the update is complete, reboot AI296.  
Configuring BOOTP/TFTP  
The AI296 configuration can be automatically downloaded from a TFTP server when  
the card is in standalone mode and has BOOTP information stored in AI198 Menu 10.  
For more information about BOOTP configuration, refer to “Configuring the BOOTP  
Table” in the AI198 Common Logic Controller System Manager/User’s Manual.  
When AI296 starts, it determines if the following conditions are met before using  
BOOTP to find IP address information:  
z
z
AI296 is in standalone mode  
The IP address is not set.  
If both of these conditions are met, AI296 attempts to contact a BOOTP server until it  
obtains valid IP address information or the IP address is set by a user with the  
ip initshell command. When an IP address has been obtained either by BOOTP or  
through the ip init command, AI296 will resume its boot process.  
The following events occur when AI296 attempts to download a configuration file from  
the TFTP server:  
z
Once the IP address information has been correctly configured from the BOOTP  
reply, AI296 will attempt to contact a TFTP server only if the TFTP server IP  
address and configuration filename were received by the BOOTP reply.  
z
z
AI296 will try to download the configuration file from the TFTP server once every  
60 seconds for a maximum of 10 retries.  
If no valid configuration file is downloaded from the TFTP server after 10 retries,  
AI296 will remove the previously configured IP address information from the  
BOOTP server and completely restart the BOOTP process.  
z
z
If at any time the local configuration file stored on flash is changed by a user,  
AI296 will stop attempting to contact the TFTP server.  
If a valid configuration is successfully downloaded from the TFTP server, AI296  
will update the current configuration with the downloaded file.  
B-3  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
Switch Mode  
Switch mode refers to the mode where AI296 is managed by the CLC. When AI296 is  
in switch mode, the AI198 menu system must be used to configure IP addresses,  
aliases, IP static routes, and SNMP traps. AI296 must be located in the AI130 or  
AI180 chassis to operate in switch mode.  
The following characteristics apply when AI296 is operating in switch mode:  
z
AI296 gets its configuration from the CLC at boot time (instead of locally or by  
TFTP).  
z
z
z
The CLC is used to route calls and maintain alias configuration information.  
The IRB is the default port (rather than the front panel Ethernet port).  
AI296 cards are hot-swappable—the card configuration does not have to be set  
up manually.  
z
The banner must be less than 1024 characters.  
Note: Switch mode may also be referred to as CLC mode.  
Downloading Software for AI296 in Switch Mode  
To download software for AI296 when it is in switch mode:  
1. Open a command prompt window.  
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:  
ftp  
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI198:  
open ip_address  
ip_address  
Specifies the AI198 IP address.  
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.  
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:  
binary  
B-4  
   
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
5. Transfer the software image to AI198:  
put filepath/imagename.img  
filepath  
Defines the path to the software image file.  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.  
6. Exit the FTP utility.  
7. Log in to AI198.  
8. At the command prompt, update AI296 with the new software image:  
winslc baseport update  
baseport  
Defines the baseport of AI296.  
Note: You can watch the download process by entering CTRL+L.  
9. Wait for the completion message.  
B-5  
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
B-6  
C
Commands for AI296 TACACS+  
Server Enhancements  
This appendix provides a list of commands that users need when configuring a TACACS+ server  
to utilize AI296’s authorization enhancements.  
Guide to this Appendix  
C-1  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI296 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI296 Commands  
AI296 Commands  
Important: To authorize a command with no additional arguments, remember to  
enter permit ^$in the argument list.  
The following AI296 commands can be included in an authorization set on the  
TACACS+ server:  
2401  
pvclist  
queue  
ip  
aaa  
ai  
alarm  
arp  
link  
log  
break  
cat  
logout  
ls  
clear  
crash  
crc  
reset  
rm  
selcnf  
sholog  
show  
creset  
date  
debug  
del  
snmp  
id  
delete  
diag-conn  
diag-eth  
diag-info  
diag-line  
diag-tconn  
dir  
sonic  
staeia  
standalone  
staslc  
syncflash  
tacacs  
tail  
exit  
task  
head  
tcpoutconn  
tftp  
help  
memory  
memtrack  
menu  
tftpboot  
timezone  
type  
modmux  
more  
update  
uptime  
useradd  
userdel  
users  
who  
passwd  
ping  
pppstatus  
profile  
The following keyword lets users access destinations:  
dest  
Provides authorization at the destination menu. Individual destination  
names can be used as arguments. For example, {permit AI, permit  
somedestination, permit EXIT}.  
C-2  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI296 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI296 Menu Aliases  
AI296 Menu Aliases  
The following AI296 menu aliases can be included in an authorization set on the  
TACACS+ server. Authorization occurs when level 1 menu items are traversed:  
menu  
Provides access to the menu.  
menu_alias  
Provides read access to the Alias menu.  
menu_alias write  
Provides write access to the Alias menu.  
menu_link  
Provides read access to the Link menu.  
menu_link write  
Provides write access to the Link menu.  
menu_ipx  
Provides read access to the IP Over X.25 Subnet menu.  
menu_ipx write  
Provides write access to the IP Over X.25 Subnet menu.  
menu_route  
Provides read access to the Static route menu.  
menu_route write  
Provides write access to the Static route menu.  
menu_system  
Provides read access to the System menu.  
menu_system write  
Provides write access to the System menu.  
Note: Keyword writeis treated as an argument.  
C-3  
 
AI296 Version 9.8x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI296 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: FTP Sessions  
FTP Sessions  
The following AI296 keywords apply to FTP access:  
ftplogin  
Provides FTP read access.  
ftpwrite  
Provides FTP write access.  
C-4  
 

Kenwood DDX6029 User Manual
Medion MD 80137 User Manual
Miele KM 5993 User Manual
MSi 865GM3 User Manual
NEC AccuSync Series User Manual
Oki 70049301 User Manual
Omron Computer Hardware C200HE User Manual
Palsonic 5159P User Manual
Philips DVDR5350H User Manual
Philips RC4420 User Manual